Pioneer VSX-LX60 Stereo Receiver User Manual

Pioneer VSX-LX60 Stereo Receiver User Manual
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 1 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Operating Instructions
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 2 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
IMPORTANT
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel.
IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 10 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please
ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 10 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark
on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement
cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.
If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe
electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Blue : Neutral Brown : Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ;
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En
WARNING
WARNING
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
The voltage of the available power supply differs
according to country or region. Be sure that the
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
or 120 V) written on the rear panel.
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire
or shock hazard, do not place any container filled
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain
D3-4-2-1-3_A_En
or moisture.
WARNING
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
equipment.
This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC and EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.
VENTILATION CAUTION
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 60 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
30 cm at each side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 3 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
on vacation).
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
(for example, when on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
strong artificial light)
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which
requires repair will be charged for even during the
K041_En
warranty period.
Important information about this unit‘s AC outlets
Switched total 100 W, 0.4 A MAX
Power supplied through these outlets is turned on and off by this unit’s STANDBY/ON switch. Total electrical
power consumption of connected equipment should not exceed 100 W, 0.4 A.
CAUTION
• Do not connect a TV set, monitor, heater or similar appliance to this unit’s AC outlet.
• Do not connect appliances with high power consumption to the AC outlet in order to avoid overheating and fire
D3-4-2-2-1b_B_En
risk. This can cause this unit to malfunction.
If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used
electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling.
Private households in the member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to
designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one).
For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal.
By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential
negative effects on the environment and human health.
K058_A_En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 4 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.
Contents
01 Before you start
05 Listening to your system
Checking what’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Loading the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Auto playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Home THX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening in stereo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Front Stage Surround Advance. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Stream Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . .
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . .
Using the genre synchronizing function. . . . . . . . . . .
02 5 minute guide
Introduction to home theater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Listening to Surround Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . . 9
Playing a source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Better sound using Phase Control and
Full Band Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Using Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Using Full Band Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
03 Connecting your equipment
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
When making cable connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
About the video converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Connecting your TV and DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or
other set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and
other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Using the component video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting digital audio sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
About the WMA9 Pro decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting analog audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting a component to the front panel inputs . . . 18
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Placing the speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
THX speaker system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Connecting antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
AC outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
04 Controls and displays
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . 24
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4
En
28
28
28
29
29
30
30
30
31
31
31
32
33
06 USB playback
Using the USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a file from the folder/file list for playback. . .
Compressed audio compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
34
34
35
07 Using the tuner
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving FM stereo sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Neural THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving station presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
An introduction to RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching for RDS programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using EON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
38
38
08 The System Setup menu
Making receiver settings from
the System Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional. . . . . . . . . . . .
Full Band Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speaker Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THX Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
39
42
42
43
44
44
45
45
47
48
50
50
51
51
52
52
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 5 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
09 Other connections
13 Controlling the rest of your system
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Connecting your iPod to the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
iPod playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Watching photos and video content . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs. . . . . . . . 55
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . . 56
Speaker B setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Bi-amping your front speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Bi-wiring your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Connecting additional amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
MULTI-ZONE listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Connecting an IR receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Switching components on and off using
the 12 volt trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display . . . 61
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer
plasma display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output . . . . . 63
Advanced MCACC output using your PC . . . . . . . . . 63
Setting the remote to control other components. . . .
Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming signals from other remote controls . . .
Erasing one of the remote control button settings . . .
Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Confirming preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renaming input source names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi Operation and System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming a multi-operation or
a shutdown sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using multi operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using System off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for TVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 HDMI Control
Making the HDMI Control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Setting the HDMI options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Setting the HDMI Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Synchronized amp mode operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
About HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
11 Other Settings
The Input Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Input function default and possible settings . . . . . . 67
The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
ZONE Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays. . . . . . . . . . 68
OSD Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
76
76
76
77
77
77
78
78
78
78
79
79
79
80
81
14 Additional information
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB interface (VSX-LX60 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iPod messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . . .
About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Neural Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening modes with different input signal formats. . .
Stream direct with different input signal formats . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Our philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
82
83
84
85
85
86
86
87
87
88
88
89
89
90
90
90
91
92
95
96
97
97
97
12 Using other functions
Setting the Audio options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Playing a different source when recording. . . . . . . . 72
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Switching the speaker impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Checking your system settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 6 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
01
Before you start
Chapter 1:
Before you start
Checking what’s in the box
Loading the batteries
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied
accessories:
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m)
• Remote control unit
• AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries x2
• AM loop antenna
• FM wire antenna
• Power cord
• Warranty card
• These operating instructions
• Operating instructions for HOME MEDIA GALLERY
(VSX-LX70 only)
Installing the receiver
• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a
level and stable surface.
Don’t install it on the following places:
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off
a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.
– in direct sunlight
– in damp or wet areas
– in extremely hot or cold areas
– in places where there is vibration or other movement
– in places that are very dusty
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)
6
En
Caution
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:
• Never use new and old batteries together.
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries
properly according to the marks in the battery case.
• Batteries with the same shape may have different
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.
• Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
area.
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 7 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
5 minute guide
02
Chapter 2:
5 minute guide
Introduction to home theater
Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to
create a surround sound effect, making you feel like
you’re in the middle of the action or concert. The
surround sound you get from a home theater system
depends not only on your speaker setup, but also on the
source and the sound settings of the receiver.
This receiver will automatically decode multichannel
Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround sources according
to your speaker setup. In most cases, you won’t have to
make changes for realistic surround sound, but other
possibilities (like listening to a CD with multichannel
surround sound) are explained in Listening to your
system on page 28.
Listening to Surround Sound
This receiver was designed with the easiest possible
setup in mind, so with the following quick setup guide,
you should have your system hooked up for surround
sound in no time at all. In most cases, you can simply
leave the receiver in the default settings.
• Be sure to complete all connections before
connecting this unit to an AC power source.
1 Connect your TV and DVD player.
See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 14 to do
this. For surround sound, you’ll want to hook up using a
digital connection from the DVD player to the receiver.
2 Connect your speakers and place them for optimal
surround sound.
Connect your speakers as shown in Installing your
speaker system on page 19.
Where you place the speakers will have a big effect on the
sound. Place your speakers as shown below for the best
surround sound effect. Also see Placing the speakers on
page 20 for more on this.
Center (C)
Front
Left (L)
Front
Right (R)
Subwoofer (SW)
Surround
Right (SR)
Surround
Back
Right (SBR)
Listening
position
Surround
Left (SL)
Surround
Back Left (SBL)
3 Plug in the receiver and switch it on, followed by
your DVD player, your subwoofer and the TV.
Plug the power cable into the AC outlet and switch on the
receiver.1 Make sure you’ve set the video input on your TV
to this receiver. Check the manual that came with the TV
if you don’t know how to do this.
• Set the subwoofer volume to a comfortable level.
4 Use the on-screen automatic MCACC setup to set up
your system.
See Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC
& Full Band Phase Control) below for more on this.
5 Play a DVD, and adjust the volume to your liking.
Make sure that DVD/LD is showing in the receiver’s
display, indicating that the DVD input is selected. If it
isn’t, press DVD on the remote control to set the receiver
to the DVD input.
In addition to the basic playback explained in Playing a
source on page 9, there are several other sound options
you can select. See Listening to your system on page 28
for more on this.
See also Making receiver settings from the System Setup
menu on page 39 for more setup options.
Note
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 15-second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during this process.
The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the
HDMI Control mode to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the HDMI Control feature, see HDMI Control on page 64.
7
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 8 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
5 minute guide
02
Automatically setting up for surround
sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase
Control)
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic
characteristics of your listening area, taking into account
ambient noise, speaker size and distance, and tests for
both channel delay and channel level. After you have set
up the microphone provided with your system, the
receiver uses the information from a series of test tones
to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your
particular room, and also to calibrate the frequencyphase characteristics of the speakers connected.
Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a
source on page 9.
Important
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the
headphones should be disconnected and the iPod,
HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSXLX60 only) function should not be selected as an input
source.
Caution
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are
output at high volume.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
SELECT
SOURCE
D.ACCESS
CLASS
CLEAR
+10
DISC
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
TUNE
BAND
SETUP
ST
ST
ENTER
RETURN
PROGRAM TUNE
PTY SEARCH GUIDE
CD
1
CD-R
DVD
TV
DVR2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
TV CONTROL
HDMI
BD
TV CTRL
TV VOL
ZONE2/3
TUNER
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel
door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack:
AUDIO
SPEAKERS
PHONES
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
BAND
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SIGNAL
SELECT
SB ch
STEREO/
PROCESSING F.S.SURR
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
(ST)
SETUP
ENTER
(TUNE)
(ST)
RETURN
DIGITAL IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
The Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone
is connected.1
DV D/ L D
- 5 5 . 0dB
1 . Au to MCACC
S u rr Ba ck S y s te m
[No rma l (d e fa u l t)]
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
RECEIVER
2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
Place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your
normal listening position (use a tripod if possible). Make
sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and
the microphone.
INPUT
SELECT
TV CH
VOL
S av e S Y MME T RY to
[M1 . ME MO RY 1
]
S TART
E NT E R:S ta r t
:Ca n c e l
3 Make sure ‘Normal (Default)’ is selected,2 select an
MCACC preset3 then select START.4
4 Follow the instructions on-screen.
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re
using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to
a comfortable volume level.
5 Wait for the test tones to finish then confirm the
speaker configuration in the OSD.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
it’s doing this.5
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 6.
RECEIVER
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Note
1 • You can’t use the System Setup menu in either the main or sub zone when the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only)
input source is selected. When you set ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to ON (page 60), you can’t use the System Setup menu.
• If you cancel the Auto MCACC Setup, or leave an error message for over three minutes, the screen saver will appear.
2 • If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker
setting on page 42 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select CUSTOM and choose YES for the THX Speaker setting.
3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can
rename it later in Data Management on page 48).
4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJUST and
FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39 for more on this.
5 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
8
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 9 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
5 minute guide
02
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise! or Check Microphone) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup below) and verifying the
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a
problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and
continue.
DVD /L D
1. Auto MCACC
N ow A n a lyzing …
Enviro n ment Check
A m b ient Noise
M icro phone
Sp eaker Y E S /NO
0.0dB
( 2/11)
[ OK ]
[
]
[
]
DV D/LD
1. Auto MCACC
CHE CK
Front
[ YES ]
Center
[ YES ]
S ur r
[ YES ]
SB
[ Y E S x2 ]
SW
[ YES ]
0.0dB
10:Next
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto
MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the
microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check
for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,
etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch
them off if necessary. If there are any instructions
showing in the front panel display, please follow them.
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of
the microphone. If this seems to be happening,
switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.
OK
:Cancel
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup
:Cancel
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.1
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the
power and check the speaker connections. If there
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use /
to select the speaker and / to change the setting
(and number for surround back) and continue.
6 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for Channel Level, Speaker
Distance, Standing Wave, Acoustic Cal EQ and Full Band
Phase Control.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
7 The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press RETURN
to go back to the System Setup menu.2
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
System Setup menu (starting on page 39).3
Playing a source
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such
as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.
PTY SEARCH GUIDE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
SELECT
TV VOL
VOL
TV CH
SYSTEM OFF
RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECT
SOURCE
INFO
REC
TV/DTV
A
MUTE
REC STOP JUKEBOX
EON
MPX
B
C
AUDIO SUBTITLE
D
HDD
DISP
CH
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
CD
CD-R
DVD
TV
DVR2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
HDMI
BD
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
CH
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV.SURR
TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
TUNER
MULTI OPE
E
DVD
MCACC
S.DIRECT
RECEIVER
1 Switch on your system components and receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component (for
example a DVD player), your TV4 and subwoofer (if you
have one), then the receiver (press  RECEIVER).
• Make sure the setup mic is disconnected.
2 Select the input source you want to play.
You can use the input source buttons on the remote
control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT
SELECTOR dial.5
Note
1 If you’re using the front panel display, the diagram in Listening to Surround Sound above indicates (in bold) how each speaker is displayed.
2 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39 for more on this.
3 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings.
You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 50.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
4 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO 1 jacks on your TV, make sure that the
VIDEO 1 input is now selected).
5 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 31).
9
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 10 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
02
5 minute guide
3 Press S.DIRECT (STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO
SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.1
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound
DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are
playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the
front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.
• See also Listening to your system on page 28 for
information on different ways of listening to sources.
4 Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.
Better sound using Phase Control and
Full Band Phase Control
This receiver is equipped with the two types of functions
that correct phase distortion and group delay: Phase
Control and Full Band Phase Control. Activating Full
Band Phase Control is strongly recommended because it
also involves the effects of Phase Control. For details on
each of these two features, refer to the following
explanations.
Using Phase Control
During multichannel playback, LFE (Low-Frequency
Effects) signals as well as low-frequency signals in each
channel are assigned to the subwoofer or other the
subwoofer and the most appropriate speaker. At least in
theory, however, this type of processing involves a group
delay that varies with frequency, resulting in phase
distortion where the low-frequency sound is delayed or
muffled by the conflict with other channels. With the
Phase Control mode switched on, this receiver can
reproduce powerful bass sound without deteriorating the
quality of the original sound (see illustration below).
Phase Control OFF
Listening
position
Front speaker
Sound
source
Sound muffled due
to a delay in time
Subwoofer
• Rhythms blurred and difficult to hear
• Bass sound with loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with no reality
Phase Control ON
Listening
position
Front speaker
Sound
source
Original sound
preserved with
no loss of clarity
Subwoofer
• Rhythms with crystal-like clarity
• Bass sound with no loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound
reproduction through the use of phase matching2 for an
optimal sound image at your listening position. The
default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase
Control switched on for all sound sources.
T.DISP
PHOTO
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV. SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
• Press PHASE (PHASE CONTROL) to select PHASE
CONTROL.
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.
Note
1 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and
88.2 kHz/96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must be set to a
multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 28 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround sound.
2 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough together,
resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough (as shown in the upper section of the diagram
above) then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.
• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set
to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the
orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to OFF. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher value.
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.
• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
– When MULTI CH IN is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options.
10
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 11 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
5 minute guide
02
Using Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the
frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers
connected.
Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use
generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency
bands output from a speaker system consisting of
multiple speakers (in case of typical 3-way speakers, for
instance, the tweeter, the squawker (midrange), and the
woofer output sound in the high-, middle-, and lowfrequency ranges, respectively). Though these speakers
are designed to flatten the frequency-amplitude
characteristics across wide ranges, there are cases
where the group delay characteristics are not effectively
flattened. This phase distortion of the speakers
subsequently causes group delay (the delay of lowfrequency sound against high-frequency sound) during
audio signal playback.
This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase
characteristics of the speakers by calibrating test signals
output from the speakers with the supplied microphone,
therefore flattening the analyzed frequency-phase
characteristics during audio signal playback1 – the same
correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers.
This correction minimizes group delay between the
ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency-phase
characteristics across all ranges.
Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase
characteristics between channels ensure better
surround sound integration for multichannel setting.2
Sound in the middle- and low-frequency ranges is
delayed against the high-frequency sound due to group
delay.
Full Band Phase Control ON
Tweeter
Midrange
Woofer
Group Delay Characteristics
ms
Hz
With the phase distortion corrected, the frequency-phase
characteristics are improved across all ranges.
• Sound with live dynamics
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality
• Sound so accurately reproduced that you can even
hear the lip movement of the singer
• Speech heard with no loss of clarity
• Surround sound with excellent integration
T.DISP
PHOTO
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV. SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
Full Band Phase Control OFF
• Press PHASE (PHASE CONTROL) to select
FULLBAND PHASE.3
Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control
functions are switched on. The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
indicator lights on the front panel display.
Tweeter
Midrange
Woofer
Group Delay Characteristics
ms
Hz
Note
1 To calibrate and analyze the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, follow the procedures in Auto MCACC (see Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8) or FULL BAND PHASE CTRL in the System Setup (see Full Band Phase Control on page 47).
Select ALL when you perform the Auto MCACC setup with CUSTOM. Upon calibration of the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, the FULL
BAND PHASE CTRL feature is automatically switched on. Note that FULLBAND PHASE cannot be selected unless the frequency-phase characteristics of
the speakers are calibrated.
2 The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after correction can be displayed graphically in the
OSD (see Full Band Phase Control on page 47). Also, when your PC is connected to this receiver, the original characteristics of group delay of the speakers
calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on your PC (see Advanced MCACC output using your PC on
page 63).
3 • The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
– When headphones are plugged in.
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
– When MULTI CH IN is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options.
11
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 12 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Connecting your equipment
03
Chapter 3:
Connecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the
kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.
Rear panel
This illustration shows the VSX-LX70, however connections for the VSX-LX60 are the same except where noted.
1
5
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
3
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
IN
1
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
IR
4
HDMI
IN 1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
AM LOOP
6
CONTROL
IN
IN 2
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
7
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
ASSIGNABLE
1
MONITOR
OUT
10
R
OUT
Y
Y
MONITOR
OUT
11
IN 3
1
PB
PB
1
SURROUND
DVD/LD
IN
SURROUND
BACK
OUT
(DVD/
LD)
IN 4
IN 2 (CD)
20
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
(Single)
CD-R/
TAPE
MD
R
PR
R
L
R
L
16
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
IN 3
Y
Y
IN
PB
PB
OUT
PR
PR
IN
R
(BD)
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
OUT
IN 2
AC OUTLET
SWITCHED 100 W 0.4 A MAX
L
IN
13
SUB W.
PR
CENTER
SUB W.
BD
IN
2
AC IN
L FRONT
IN
4
ASSIGNABLE
19
PRE OUT
R
L
(DVD/
LD)
IN 4
(CD-R)
15
AUDIO
PHONO
CD
2
IN 1
12
IN
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
IN 1
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
9
2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
ANTENNA
ZONE2
OUT
MAIN
IN
2
8
L
17
IN
18
A
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK /
B
L(Single)
iPod
COAXIAL
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
1
4
DIGITAL
DVR/
VCR 2
SURROUND BACK
14
RS-232C
2
1
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
ASSIGNABLE 1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
12 V TRIGGER
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
Caution
• Before making or changing the connections, switch
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
1 Optical digital audio output(s)
Use the OUT1 and (VSX-LX70 only) OUT2 jack for
recording to a CD or MiniDisc recorder.
 See Connecting digital audio sources on page 17.
The OUT1 jack is also used for MULTI-ZONE connections.
 See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 58.
2 Optical and coaxial digital audio inputs (x6)
Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/
recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.
 See also The Input Setup menu on page 66 to assign
the inputs.
3
LAN (10/100) terminal (VSX-LX70 only)
 For details, refer to the supplied operating
instructions for HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
4 HDMI connectors (x4) (VSX-LX60) (x5) (VSX-LX70)
Multiple inputs and one output for high-quality audio/
video connection to compatible HDMI devices.
 See Connecting using HDMI on page 54.
12
En
MULTI CH IN
SELECTABLE
5 Remote inputs (MULTI-ZONE and source)
Use for connection to an external remote control sensor
for use in a MULTI-ZONE setup, for example.
 See Connecting an IR receiver on page 60.
6 Control input/output
Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you can
control all your equipment from a single IR remote sensor.
 See Operating other Pioneer components with this
unit’s sensor on page 81.
7 Component video connections (x4)
Use the inputs to connect any video source that has
component video output, such as a DVD recorder. Use
the output for connection to a monitor or TV.
 See Using the component video jacks on page 16.
8 AM and FM antenna terminals
Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio
broadcasts.
 See Connecting antennas on page 21.
9 MULTI-ZONE and source outputs
Use to connect a second amplifier in a separate room.
 See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 58.
10 Composite and S-video monitor outputs
Use to connect monitors and TVs.
 See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 14.
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 13 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Connecting your equipment
11 Audio/video source inputs/(outputs) (x6)
Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD
players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks
for composite video, S-video1 and stereo analog audio.
 See Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other
video sources on page 16.
03
When making cable connections
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the
top of the receiver.
12 Stereo analog audio source inputs/(outputs) (x3)
Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players,
tape decks, turntables, etc.
 See Connecting analog audio sources on page 18.
13 Multichannel analog audio inputs
7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with
multichannel analog outputs.
 See Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on
page 55.
14 12 V trigger jacks (total 50 mA max.) (x2)
Use to switch components in your system on and off
according to the input function of the receiver.
 See Switching components on and off using the 12
volt trigger on page 61.
15 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs
Use to connect separate amplifiers for center, surround,
surround back and subwoofer channels.
 See Connecting additional amplifiers on page 58 (see
also Installing your speaker system on page 19 for
powered subwoofer connection).
16 iPod input terminal
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio or video
source.
 See Connecting an iPod on page 53.
17 RS-232C connector
Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when
using Advanced MCACC or Full Band Phase Control.
 See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on
page 63.
18 Speaker terminals
Use for connection to the main front, center, surround
and surround back speakers.
 See Installing your speaker system on page 19.
19 AC IN inlet
Connect the supplied power cord here.
 See Plugging in the receiver on page 22.
20 Switched AC power outlet (100 W/0.4 A max.)
Use to power another component in the system. Power to
the outlet switches on and off with the receiver.
 See AC outlet on page 22.
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when
inserting the plug not to damage the shutter
protecting the optical socket.
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable
may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.
About the video converter
The video converter ensures that all video sources are
output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks.
The only exception is HDMI and high-definition
component video: since these resolutions cannot be
downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the
receiver’s HDMI/component video outputs when
connecting these video sources.2
If several video components are assigned to the same
input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 66),
the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, S-video,
then composite (in that order).
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends
switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the
Video options on page 71) OFF.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Note
1 You must assign the input source to the S-video input to which you’ve connected your video component (see The Input Setup menu on page 66).
2 If the video signal does not appear on your TV or plasma display, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some
components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video
options on page 71) OFF.
13
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 14 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting your TV and DVD player
1 Connect the MONITOR OUT video jack to a video
input on your TV.
Use a standard RCA/phono jack video cable to connect to
the composite video jack, or for higher quality video, use
an S-video cable to connect to the S-video jack.
2 Connect a composite or S-video output on your
DVD player to the DVD/LD VIDEO or DVD/LD S-VIDEO
input.
Connect using a standard video cable or an S-video
cable.
TV
VIDEO
IN
3 Connect a coaxial-type1 digital audio output on
your DVD player to the COAXIAL IN 1 (DVD/LD) input.
Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio.
S-VIDEO
IN
1
4 Connect the stereo audio outputs on your DVD
player to the DVD/LD AUDIO inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
ANTENNA
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
ZONE2
IN
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
MAIN
R
L
CD
IN
HDMI
IN 1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
IN
OUT
2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
ASSIGNABLE
1
IN 1
OUT
Y
Y
OUT
1
PB
PB
R
PR
PR
IN 2
IN 3
Y
Y
R
SUB W.
4
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN
(DVD/
LD)
IN 3
IN 4
(CD-R)
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs,
you can connect these instead. See also Connecting
the multichannel analog inputs on page 55.
BD
IN
2
IN 2
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
AUDIO
PHONO
AM LOOP
IR
1
OUT2
OUT
2
IN 4
IN 2 (CD)
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
R
(BD)
PB
OPTICAL
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
4
ASSIGNABLE
1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL
IN 1
IN
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
1
ASSIGNABLE
1
PR
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
IN
ZONE2
R
L
CD
L
AUDIO
12 V TR
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA
VSX-LX70
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
IN
OUT
2
HDMI
SURROUN
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
ASSIGNABLE
1
OUT
BD
IN
2
IN 2
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
IN 1
OUT
Y
Y
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN
R
(DVD/
LD)
IN 3
IN 4
(CD-R)
1
PB
PB
R
SUB W.
4
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
AUDIO
PHONO
AM LOOP
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
MAIN
LAN (10/100)
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
ZONE2
IN
OUT
PB
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
1
OUT2
COAXIAL
OUT
ANTENNA
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
PR
PR
IN 2
IN 3
Y
Y
IN
PB
OUT
OUT
2
IN 4
IN 2 (CD)
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
R
(BD)
COAXIAL
PB
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
3
S-VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
2
R
SURROUN
IN
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
4
ASSIGNABLE
1
3
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO L
ANALOG OUT
PR
1
ASSIGNABLE
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
12 V TR
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA
VSX-LX70
4
DVD player
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together
with a TV and DVD player, with S-video or composite
video connections. Different TVs and DVD players may
offer alternative connections. See also Using the
component video jacks on page 16 if your TV and/or DVD
player has component video inputs/outputs. If your DVD
player offers multichannel analog audio outputs, see
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 55.
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
3
S-VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
2
R
AUDIO L
ANALOG OUT
4
Blu-ray disc player
Note
1 If your DVD player only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable. When you set
up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 66).
14
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 15 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Connecting your equipment
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together
with a Blu-ray disc player, with S-video or composite
video connections. See also Using the component video
jacks on page 16 if your Blu-ray disc player has
component video inputs/outputs. If your Blu-ray disc
player offers multi-channel analog audio outputs, see
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 55.
1 Connect a composite or S-video output on your Bluray disc player to the BD VIDEO or BD S-VIDEO input.
Connect using a standard video cable or an S-video
cable.
2 Connect an optical-type1 digital audio output on
your Blu-ray disc player to the OPTICAL IN 2 (BD) input.
Connect using an optical cable.
03
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or
other set-top box
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV
tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.
VSX-LX70
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
IN
1
OUT2
• If your Blu-ray disc player has multi-channel analog
outputs, you can connect these instead. See also
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on
page 55.
ZONE2
AM LOOP
IN
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
R
L
CD
IN
HDMI
IN 1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
IN
OUT
2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
ASSIGNABLE
1
OUT
BD
IN
2
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN 2
IN 1
Y
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
OUT
Y
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
IN
R
(DVD/
LD)
IN 3
IN 4
(CD-R)
PB
PB
R
SUB W.
4
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
AUDIO
PHONO
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
MAIN
1
3 Connect the stereo audio outputs on your Blu-ray
disc player to the BD AUDIO inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
PR
PR
IN 2
IN 3
Y
Y
IN
PB
OUT
OUT
2
IN 4
IN 2 (CD)
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
R
(BD)
COAXIAL
OUT
PB
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
ASSIGNABLE
1
4
DIGITAL
PR
SURROUN
IN
1
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
ASSIGNABLE
1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
12 V TR
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA M
DIGITAL OUT
R
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AV OUT
STB
1 Connect the audio/video outputs on the set-top
box to the TV/SAT AUDIO and VIDEO inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable and a
video or S-video2 cable.
2 Connect an optical-type3 digital audio output from
your set-top box to the OPTICAL IN 1 (TV/SAT) input.4
Use an optical cable for the connection.
Note
1 If your Blu-ray disc player only has an coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using an coaxial cable. When
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see The System Setup menu on page 39).
2 See The Input Setup menu on page 66 to assign the S-VIDEO 2 input to the TV/SAT input function if you make this connection.
3 If your set-top box only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 66).
4 If your satellite/cable receiver doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.
15
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 16 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
03
Connecting your equipment
• For a second recorder, use the DVR/VCR2 outputs.
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR
and other video sources
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and
outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video
devices, including DVD/HDD recorders and VCRs.
VSX-LX70
Using the component video jacks
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
ZONE2
IN
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
MAIN
R
L
CD
IN
HDMI
IN 1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
ASSIGNABLE
1
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
IN
OUT
2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
OUT
BD
IN
2
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN 2
OUT
IN 1
Y
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
Y
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
IN
R
(DVD/
LD)
IN 3
IN 4
(CD-R)
PB
PB
L
R
L
F
SUB W.
4
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
AUDIO
PHONO
AM LOOP
IR
1
OUT2
1
3 If the device can output digital audio, connect an
optical-type1 digital audio output from the recorder to
the OPTICAL IN 3 (DVR/VCR1) input.
Use an optical cable for the connection.2
PR
PR
IN 4
IN 2
IN 3
Y
Y
CENTER
OUT
2
IN 2 (CD)
Component video should give superior picture quality
when compared to composite or S-video. You can also
take advantage of progressive scan video (if your source
and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very stable,
flicker-free picture. See the manuals that came with your
TV and source component to check whether they are
compatible with progressive-scan video.
VSX-LX70
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
R
(BD)
L
COAXIAL
OUT
PB
PB
PR
PR
DVR/
VCR 2
ASSIGNABLE
1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
S-VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
ZONE2
IN
ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN
12 V TRIGGER
HDMI
OPTICAL
IN 1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
ASSIGNABLE
1
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
IN
OUT
2
LAN (10/100)
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
OUT
BD
IN
2
IN 2
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN
OUT
IN 1
Y
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
Y
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
R
(DVD/
LD)
IN 3
IN 4
(CD-R)
1
PB
PB
L
R
L
F
SUB W.
4
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
AUDIO
PHONO
AM LOOP
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
MAIN
2
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
1
OUT2
IN
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
4
DIGITAL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
SURROUND BACK
1
ASSIGNABLE
1
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT
PR
PR
IN 2
IN 3
Y
Y
IN
PB
OUT
OUT
2
IN 4
IN 2 (CD)
CENTER
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
R
(BD)
L
COAXIAL
OUT
PB
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL
R
AUDIO
3
L
VIDEO S-VIDEO
AV OUT
R
AUDIO
1
PR
1
4
DIGITAL
IN
2
1
ASSIGNABLE
L VIDEO S-VIDEO
AV IN
SURROUND BACK
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
ASSIGNABLE
1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
12 V TRIGGER
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
2
Y
DVR, VCR, etc.
PB
PR
1 Connect the audio/video outputs of the video
player/recorder to the DVR/VCR1 AUDIO and VIDEO
inputs.
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio
connection and a video or S-video cable for the video
connection.
2
TV
Y
PB
• For a second recorder, use the DVR/VCR2 IN inputs.
2 If the device can record, connect the DVR/VCR1
AUDIO and VIDEO outputs to the recorder’s audio/
video inputs.
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio
connection and a video or S-video cable for the video
connection.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
1
COMPONENT
VIDEO
DVD player
1 Connect the component video outputs of your source
to a set of ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO inputs.
Connect using a three-way component video cable.
Note
1 • In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback only).
• If your video component doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.
2 If your recorder only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable. When
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 66).
16
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 17 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Connecting your equipment
03
• Since they are assignable, it doesn’t matter which
component video inputs you use for which source.
After connecting everything, you’ll need to assign the
component video inputs—see The Input Setup menu
on page 66.
2 Connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to the
component video inputs on your TV or monitor.
Use a three-way component video cable.
Connecting digital audio sources
Most digital components also have analog connections.
See Connecting analog audio sources on the following
page if you want to connect these too.
VSX-LX70
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
IN
1
OUT2
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
IN
OUT
2
HDMI
IN 1
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
ASSIGNABLE
1
OUT
BD
IN
2
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN 2
IN 1
Y
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
OUT
Y
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
IN
R
(DVD/
LD)
IN 3
IN 4
(CD-R)
1
PB
PB
L
R
L
SUB W.
4
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
IN
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
PR
PR
IN 2
IN 3
Y
Y
IN 4
IN
PB
OUT
CENTE
OUT
2
IN 2 (CD)
This unit has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9
Professional3 (WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using a coaxial or
optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9 Procompatible player. However, the connected PC, DVD player,
set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro format
audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital output.
AM LOOP
IR
MAIN
2 For recording equipment, connect one of the
optical-type DIGITAL outputs to a digital input on the
recorder.
Use an optical cable to connect to the DIGITAL OUT1 or
(VSX-LX70 only) OUT2 (OUT1 is shown in the
illustration).2
About the WMA9 Pro decoder
This receiver has both digital inputs and outputs,
allowing you to connect digital audio components for
playback and for making digital recordings.
OUT1
ZONE3
1 Connect an optical-type1 digital audio output on
your digital component to the OPTICAL IN 4 (CD-R)
input.
Use an optical cable for the connection.
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
R
(BD)
L
COAXIAL
OUT
PB
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
ASSIGNABLE
1
4
DIGITAL
1
OPTICAL
PR
SURROUND BACK
IN
2
1
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
ASSIGNABLE
1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
OPTICAL
L
AUDIO
12 V TRIGGER
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
2
DIGITAL IN
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.
Note
1 • If your digital component only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial cable. When
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 66).
• The digital outputs from other components can be connected to any spare digital audio inputs on this receiver. You can assign them when setting up
the receiver (see also The Input Setup menu on page 66).
2 • You must switch ZONE 3 ON in Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 60 to hear audio from the DIGITAL OUT1.
• In order to record some digital sources, you must make analog connections as explained in Connecting analog audio sources below.
3 • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz.
17
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 18 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting analog audio sources
This receiver features three stereo audio-only inputs. Two
of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with
audio recorders.
One of the audio inputs (PHONO) is a dedicated
turntable input which should not be used for any other
type of component. This input also has a grounding
terminal that most turntables require.
1 Connect the analog audio outputs of the source
component to one of the AUDIO inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable.
• If you’re connecting a tape deck, MD recorder, etc.,
connect the analog audio outputs (OUT) to the
analog audio inputs on the recorder.
2 Turntables only: Connect the stereo audio outputs to
the PHONO inputs.
• If your turntable has a grounding wire, secure it to the
ground terminal on this receiver.
• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a
built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD inputs
instead.
2
Turntable
Connecting a component to the front
panel inputs
The front panel inputs comprise a composite video jack
(VIDEO), an S-video jack (S-VIDEO), stereo analog audio
inputs (AUDIO L/R) and an optical digital audio input
(DIGITAL). You can use these connections for any kind of
audio/video component, but they are especially
convenient for portable equipment such as camcorders,
video games and portable audio/video equipment.
VSX-LX70
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
ZONE2
PRE OUT
AUDIO
PHONO
R
IN
ZONE2
R
L
CENTER
SUB W.
CD
IN
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
L FRONT
AM LOOP
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
SURROUND
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
SURROUND
BACK
OUT
BD
IN
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
(Single)
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
R
L
IN
R
L
R
L
SPEAKERS
FRONT
IN
CENTER
SUB W.
A
R
FRONT
L
CEN
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel
door to access the front video connections.
OUT
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
iPod
AUDIO
IN
R
SPEAKERS
L
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
BAND
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SIGNAL
SELECT
SB ch
STEREO/
PROCESSING F.S.SURR
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
PHONES
SURROUND BACK
1
L
R
VIDEO
(ST)
ENTER
(ST)
USB
RS-232C
IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
MCACC
SETUP MIC
AUDIO
2
12 V TRIGGER
MULTI CH IN
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
SETUP
(TUNE)
DIGITAL IN
RETURN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
1
OUT
PLAY
IN
REC
R
L
AUDIO IN/OUT
DIGITAL OUT
VIDEO OUTPUT
TV game, video camera, etc.
Tape deck, etc.
18
En
• Select these inputs using INPUT SELECT (remote) or
the INPUT SELECTOR dial (front panel) to select
VIDEO/GAME 2.
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 19 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Connecting your equipment
03
Installing your speaker system
To take full advantage of the receiver’s surround sound capabilities connect front, center, surround and surround back
speakers, as well as a subwoofer. Although this is ideal, other configurations with fewer speakers—no subwoofer or
no center speaker, or even no surround speakers—will work. At the very least, front left and right speakers only are
necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just
one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal). You can use speakers
with a nominal impedance between 6 Ω to 16 Ω (please see Switching the speaker impedance on page 73 if you plan to
use speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).
Front
right
Front
left
Subwoofer
Center
CAUTION
These speaker terminals carry
HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage.
To prevent the risk of electric
shock when connecting or
disconnecting the speaker
cables, disconnect the power
cord before touching any
uninsulated parts.
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
AC IN
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
ZONE2
R
L
OPTICAL
IN 1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
CONTROL
IN
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
SURROUND
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
ASSIGNABLE
1
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
MONITOR
OUT
Y
1
PB
PB
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
R
R
L
R
L
PR
Y
IN 2 (CD)
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
IN 3
IN 2
CENTER
IN
A
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK /
B
L(Single)
OUT
2
IN 4
SPEAKERS
FRONT
SUB W.
PR
L
IN
4
ASSIGNABLE
SWITCHED 100 W 0.4 A MAX
(Single)
CD-R/
TAPE
MD
(DVD/
LD)
IN 3
IN 4
(CD-R)
AC OUTLET
BD
IN
2
OUT
Y
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
SURROUND
BACK
OUT
IN 2
IN 1
CENTER
IN
OUT
2
ZONE2
L FRONT
SUB W.
CD
IN
HDMI
R
IN
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
MAIN
LAN (10/100)
PRE OUT
AUDIO
PHONO
AM LOOP
IR
Y
IN
PB
OUT
R
(BD)
iPod
L
COAXIAL
OUT
PB
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
ASSIGNABLE
1
4
DIGITAL
PR
SURROUND BACK
RS-232C
IN
1
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
ASSIGNABLE 1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
2
12 V TRIGGER
MULTI CH IN
SELECTABLE
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
VSX-LX70
Surround
left
Surround
right
Surround
back left
Connecting the speakers
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a
positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to
match these up with the terminals on the speakers
themselves.
Surround
back right
Caution
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted
together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.
If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel
it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.
19
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 20 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
03
Connecting your equipment
Bare wire connections
Make sure that the speaker cable you’re going to use is
properly prepared with about 10 mm of insulator stripped
from each wire, and the exposed wire strands twisted
together (fig. A).
To connect a terminal, unscrew the terminal a few turns
until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire
(fig. B). Once the wire is in position, tighten the terminal
until the wire is firmly clamped (fig. C).
fig. A
fig. B
fig. C
10 mm
Important
• Please refer to the manual that came with your
speakers for details on how to connect the other end
of the speaker cables to your speakers.
• Other connections on page 53 provides greater detail
on alternate speaker setups, such as using speaker
system B (page 56), bi-amping (page 57) and biwiring (page 57).
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so
that the sound of the center channel is localized at
the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker
does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of
the front left and right speakers.
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening
position. The angle depends on the size of the room.
Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
• Surround and surround back speakers should be
positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and
titled slight downward. Make sure the speakers don’t
face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should
be more directly behind the listener than for home
theater playback.
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away
from the listening position than the front and center
speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound
effect.
• To achieve the best possible surround sound, install
your speakers as shown below. Be sure all speakers
are installed securely to prevent accidents and
improve sound quality.
Front
left
• If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the
THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer
has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your
subwoofer.
Placing the speakers
Subwoofer
Surround
left
Surround
right
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect
on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines
should help you to get the best sound from your system.
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the
other speakers should be at about ear-level when
you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the
floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very
high on a wall is not recommended.
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers
2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.
• When placing speakers near the TV, we recommend
using magnetically shielded speakers to prevent
possible interference, such as discoloration of the
picture when the TV is switched on. If you do not have
magnetically shielded speakers and notice
discoloration of the TV picture, move the speakers
farther away from the TV.
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front
speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a
narrower angle.
20
En
Front
right
Center
Listening position
Surround back left
Surround back right
Single surround back speaker
Caution
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.
This not only improves sound quality, but also
reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from
speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of
external shocks such as earthquakes.
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 21 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Connecting your equipment
03
The diagrams below show suggested surround and
surround back speaker orientation. The first diagram (fig.
A) shows orientation with one surround back speaker (or
none) connected. The second (fig. B) shows orientation
with two surround back speakers connected.
Connecting antennas
The supplied antennas provide a simple way to listen to
AM and FM radio. If you find that reception quality is
poor, an outdoor antenna should give you better sound
quality—see Connecting external antennas below.
90º to 120º
RS
LS
RS
LS
0º to 60º
VSX-LX70
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
RS
LS
SBL
SB
SBL
SBR
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
SBR
IN
1
OUT2
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
ZONE2
R
L
fig. A
HDMI
fig. B
IN 1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
• If you have two surround back speakers THX
recommends placing them together and the same
distance from your listening position (see below).
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
IN 1
Y
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
1
1
PB
SURROUND
BACK
OUT
BD
IN
2
Y
PB
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
(Single)
CD-R/
TAPE
MD
OUT
R
R
L
R
L
PR
IN 2
IN 3
Y
CENTER
IN
A
R
FRONT
L
CEN
OUT
2
IN 4
SPEAKERS
FRONT
SUB W.
PR
L
IN
4
ASSIGNABLE
IN 2 (CD)
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
Y
IN
PB
OUT
R
(BD)
iPod
L
COAXIAL
If you have a complete THX speaker system, follow the
diagram below to place your speakers. Note that the
surround speakers ( indicates bi-polar radiating
speakers) should output at an angle parallel to the
listener.
OUT
PB
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
ASSIGNABLE
1
4
DIGITAL
PR
SURROUND BACK
RS-232C
IN
2
1
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
ASSIGNABLE 1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
12 V TRIGGER
MULTI CH IN
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
AM loop antenna
1
C
SURROUND
DVD/LD
IN
ASSIGNABLE
(DVD/
LD)
IN 3
IN 4
(CD-R)
THX speaker system setup
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
IN 2
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
L
CONTROL
IN
MONITOR
OUT
CENTER
IN
OUT
ZONE2
L FRONT
SUB W.
CD
2
LAN (10/100)
R
IN
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
IN
OPTICAL
PRE OUT
AUDIO
PHONO
AM LOOP
IR
MAIN
Assemble the stand as shown in the illustration.1
R
fig. A
SL
fig. B
fig. C
SR
• Bend the stand in the direction indicated (fig. A).
Surround
Surround
• Clip the loop into the stand (fig. B).
SBL
• It’s possible to fix the AM antenna to a wall (fig. C).
Before fixing, make sure that the reception is
satisfactory.
SBR
Surround back
• If you have two surround back speakers THX
recommends placing them together and the same
distance from your listening position for the following
THX modes: THX Select2 CINEMA, THX
MUSICMODE and THX GAMES MODE.
See also THX Audio Setting on page 52 to make the
settings that will give you the best sound experience
when using the Home THX modes (page 29).
2 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna
wires.
3 Press the AM LOOP antenna terminal tabs to open
and insert one wire into each terminal.
4
Release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.
5 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and point in
the direction giving the best reception.
Avoid placing near computers, television sets or other
electrical appliances and do not let it come into contact
with metal objects.
Note
1 Do not use any antennas other than the supplied AM loop antenna.
21
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 22 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
03
Connecting your equipment
FM wire antenna
• Connect the FM wire antenna to the FM UNBAL
75 Ω in the same way as the AM antenna.
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a
wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.
Plugging in the receiver
Only plug in after you have connected all your
components to this receiver, including the speakers.
Caution
Connecting external antennas
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull
out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could
cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place
the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the
power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never
make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The
power cords should be routed so that they are not
likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can
cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the
power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent
service company for a replacement.
To improve FM reception connect an external FM
antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 Ω.
75 Ω coaxial cable
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
• Do not use any power cord other than the one
supplied with this unit.
AM LOOP
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose
other than that described below.
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of
vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without
disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the
mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular
use, e.g., when on vacation.
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally
outdoors.
Outdoor antenna
1 Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket
on the back of the receiver.
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
5 m to 6 m
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
AM LOOP
• Make sure the blue  STANDBY/ON light has gone
out before unplugging.
2
Plug the other end into a power outlet.
AC outlet
Power supplied through this outlet is turned on and off by
the receiver’s power switch. Total electrical power
consumption of connected equipment should not exceed
100 W (0.4 A).
Caution
• Do not connect a TV set, monitor, heater, or similar
appliance to this unit’s AC outlet.
• Do not connect appliances with high power
consumption to the AC outlet in order to avoid
overheating and fire risk. This can also cause the
receiver to malfunction.
• Since a subwoofer or power amplifier can exceed the
100 W maximum when playing sources at a high
volume, this type of equipment should not be
connected to the AC outlet.
22
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 23 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Controls and displays
04
Chapter 4:
Controls and displays
Front panel
Illustration shows the VSX-LX70 front panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VSX-LX70
STANDBY/ON
ADVANCED
MCACC
PHASE
CONTROL
PHASE
CONTROL
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
MCACC
AUTO SURR/
POSITION STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
HDMI
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
INPUT
SELECTOR
9
MASTER
VOLUME
10
11
AUDIO
SPEAKERS
PHONES
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
BAND
20
ENTER
(TUNE)
21
(ST)
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
16
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL
ON/OFF
DIGITAL IN
RETURN
22
23
1 INPUT SELECTOR dial
Use to select an input source.
2  STANDBY/ON
Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power
indicator lights when the receiver is on.
3
15
14
SIGNAL
SELECT
17
18
SB ch
STEREO/
PROCESSING F.S.SURR
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
(ST)
SETUP
19
12 13
PHASE CONTROL – Press to switch on/off Phase
Control or Full Band Phase Control (page 10).
MCACC POSITION – Press to switch between
MCACC presets (page 31).
AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT – Press to select Auto
Surround (page 28) or Stream Direct (page 30)
listening.
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
24
25
4 Remote sensor
Receives the signals from the remote control (see
Operating range of remote control unit on page 24).
5 Character display
See Display on page 25.
6
PHASE CONTROL indicator – Lights to indicate
Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control is selected
(page 10).
ADVANCED MCACC indicator – Lights when one of
the MCACC presets (page 31) is selected.1
Digital Precision Processing indicator – Lights to
indicate digital processing (for example, it
disappears when Pure Direct (page 30) is on, or when
listening through the multichannel analog inputs).
Note
1 The MCACC indicator does not light when the MCACC preset memory currently being selected has not been corrected with Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional or when EQ is set to OFF in the Audio parameter menu (see Setting the Audio options on page 70).
23
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 24 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Controls and displays
04
DIGITAL VIDEO SCALER indicator – Lights when
Resolution is set to a setting other than PURE (for
example, when the video input signal is upscaled)
(page 70).
HDMI indicator – Blinks when connecting an HDMIequipped component; lights when the component is
connected (page 54).
7
Listening mode buttons
HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening
mode (page 29).
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard
decoding and to switch between the various
2 Pro Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 28).
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between
the various surround modes (page 29).
8
MASTER VOLUME dial
9 Front panel controls
To access the front panel controls, push gently on the
lower third portion of the panel with your finger.
17 SBch PROCESSING
Selects the surround back channel mode (page 31) or
virtual surround back mode (page 32).
18 STEREO/F.S.SURR
Switches between the stereo playback mode (page 30)
and the Front Stage Surround Advance mode (page 30).
19 PHONES jack
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are
connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.
20 SETUP
Press to access the System Setup menu (see page 39).
21 /// (TUNE/ST) /ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround
sound system (see page 39). Use the TUNE / buttons
to find radio frequencies and use ST / to find preset
stations (page 36).
22 RETURN
Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.
23 USB interface
Connect a USB audio device for playback.
See the separate manual for HOME MEDIA GALLERY
(VSX-LX70) or USB playback on page 34 (VSX-LX60).
24 MCACC SETUP MIC jack
Use to connect the supplied microphone.
10 SPEAKERS
Use to change the speaker system (page 56).
11 AUDIO PARAMETER
Use to access the Audio options (page 70).
12 VIDEO PARAMETER
Use to access the Video options (page 71).
13 TUNER EDIT
Use with / to memorize and name stations for recall
(page 36).
14 BAND
Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 36).
15 MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE/REC SEL controls
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTIZONE listening on page 58) use these controls to control
the sub zone from the main zone (see Using the MULTIZONE controls on page 60).
You will also need to use the REC SEL controls when
recording a source (see Making an audio or a video
recording on page 72).
16 SIGNAL SELECT
Use to select an input signal (page 31).
24
En
25 VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
See Connecting a component to the front panel inputs on
page 18.
Operating range of remote control unit
The remote control may not work properly if:
• There are obstacles between the remote control and
the receiver’s remote sensor.
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the
remote sensor.
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting
infrared rays.
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another
infrared remote control unit.
30
30
7m
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 25 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Controls and displays
04
Display
1
2
3
45
6
7
8
9 10
11 12
L
C
R 2DIGITAL 2HD FULL BAND PHASE CONTROL DNR TUNED RDS
DTS WMA9 Pro MULTI-ZONE DIALOG E ATT OVER STEREO EON
MONO
SL
S SR AAC DSD PCM S.RTRV SOUND Hi-Bit/Sampling V.SB
HDMI
SBL SB SBR
DIGITAL
TV
VIDEO HMG USB
CD
DVD
TUNER
LFE
ANALOG
[2]
13
14
AUTO
PCM
CD-R
PHONO
iPod
BDP DVR
HDMI
[1]
dB
[3]
SR+
[4]
STREAM DIRECT
Neo : 6
2PRO LOGIC
THX ADV.SURROUND
STEREO STANDARD
SLEEP
SP AB
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
1 SIGNAL indicators
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.
AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input
signal automatically (page 31).
STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is
being received in auto stereo mode.
2 Program format indicators
These change according to which channels are active in
digital sources.
11 EON/RDS indicators
EON – Lights when the EON mode is set (flashes
during EON reception). The indicator lights when
the current station carries the EON service (page 38).
L – Left front channel
C – Center channel
R – Right front channel
SL – Left surround channel
S – Surround channel (mono)
SR – Right surround channel
SBL – Left surround back channel
SB – Surround back channel (mono)
SBR – Right surround back channel
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the ((( ))) indicators light when
an LFE signal is being input)
3 Digital format indicators
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format
is detected (DSDPCM lights during DSD (Digital Stream
Direct) to PCM conversion with SACDs).
4 S.RTRV
Lights when the Sound Retriever is switched on (page 70).
5 MULTI-ZONE
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 58).
6 FULL BAND
Lights when the Full Band Phase Control is switched on
(page 10).
7 PHASE CONTROL
Lights when the Phase Control or Full Band Phase
Control is switched on (page 10).
8 Sound processing indicators
Light according to the active Audio parameter(s) (page 70)
and/or ANALOG ATT (page 73).
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using
the MPX button.
RDS – Lights when an RDS broadcast is received
(page 37).
12 SOUND
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or tone
controls feature is selected (page 70).
13 Master volume level
Shows the overall volume level. –80dB indicates the
minimum level, and +12dB indicates the maximum level.
14 SR+
Lights when the SR+ mode is switched on (page 62).
15 STREAM DIRECT
Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is selected (page 30).
16 Speaker indicators
Lights to indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B (page 56).
17 Listening mode indicators
THX – Lights when one of the Home THX modes is
selected.
ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the
Advanced Surround modes has been selected.
STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is switched
on (see Listening in stereo on page 30).
STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard
Surround modes is switched on (see Listening in
surround sound on page 28).
9 V.SB
Lights during Virtual surround back processing (page 32).
18 SLEEP
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 73).
10 TUNER indicators
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.
19 Matrix decoding format indicators
2 PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate
2 Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 28).
25
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 26 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
04
Controls and displays
Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver
is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing (page 28).
20 Character display
Displays various system information.
21 Input source indicators
Light to indicate the input source you have selected.
Remote control
Illustration shows the VSX-LX70 remote control
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
SELECT
RECEIVER
1
2
SOURCE
12
CD
CD-R
HDMI
DVD
TV
DVR2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD
DVR1
i Pod
ZONE2/3
TUNER
RECEIVER
SLEEP
DIMMER
SR+
GENRE
14
ANALOG
ATT
D.ACCESS
CLASS
CLEAR
+10
DISC
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
TUNE
BAND
ST
ST
ENTER
SETUP
RETURN
INFO
REC
A
B
C
AUDIO SUBTITLE
11
16
MUTE
REC STOP JUKEBOX
EON
MPX
15
VOL
TV CH
D
HDD
DISP
CH
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
E
DVD
CH
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV.SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
17
18
RECEIVER
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according
to component control using the following system (press
the corresponding input source button to access):
• Green – Receiver controls (see below)
• Red – DVD controls (page 80)
• Blue – Tuner controls (page 36)
• Yellow – iPod controls (page 53)
• White – Other controls (page 80)
26
En
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and
select the amount of time before sleep (page 73).
ANALOG ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an
analog input signal to prevent distortion (page 73).
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel,
then use / to adjust the level (page 51).
TUNE
INPUT
SELECT
TV VOL
TV/DTV
9
10
DISC (ENTER) can be used to enter commands for TV or
DTV, and also to select a disc in a multi-CD player.
GENRE – Automatically selects the most appropriate
Advanced Surround mode for the genre of the source
currently being played back (this feature is available
only when a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI
Control is connected to this receiver via HDMI)
(page 33).
TV CONTROL
8
4 Number buttons and other receiver/component
controls
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio
frequency (page 36) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.
SR+ – Switches the SR+ mode on/off (page 62).
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU PROGRAM
PTY SEARCH GUIDE
7
3 Input source buttons
Press to select control of other components (see
Controlling the rest of your system on page 76).
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 73).
TV CTRL
4
5
6
2 INPUT SELECT
Use to select the input source (use SHIFT for INPUT
SELECT
).
Press RECEIVER first to access:
13
3
1 RECEIVER
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
Press TUNER first to access:
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio
station directly using the number buttons (page 36).
CLASS – Switches between the three banks (classes)
of radio station presets (page 36).
5 Tuner/component control buttons/SETUP
These button controls can be accessed after you have
selected the corresponding input source button (DVD,
DVR1, TV, etc.). The BAND, T.EDIT and PTY SEARCH
tuner controls are explained from page 36. Press
RECEIVER first to access the following controls:
A PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio options
(page 70).
V PARAMETER – Use to access the Video options
(page 71).
SETUP – Use to access the System Setup menu
(page 39).
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current
menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu
with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 27 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Controls and displays
6 /// (TUNE/ST) /ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround
sound system (page 39) and the Audio or Video options
(page 70 or 71). Also used to control DVD menus/options
and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player. Use the
TUNE / buttons to find radio frequencies and use ST
/ to find preset stations (page 36).
7 TV CONTROL buttons
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to
the TV CTRL button. Thus if you only have one TV to hook
up to this system assign it to the TV CTRL input source
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV
CTRL button (see page 76 for more on this).
TV – Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.
TV VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.
INPUT SELECT – Use to select the TV input signal.
TV CH +/– – Use to select channels.
8 Component control buttons
The main buttons (, , etc.) are used to control a
component after you have selected it using the input
source buttons.
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after
you have selected the corresponding input source button
(for example DVD, DVR1 or TV). The following controls
can be accessed when listening to the built-in tuner:
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception
of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak then switching
to mono will improve the sound quality (page 36).
04
SETUP – Indicates the setup mode, from which you
choose the options below.
PRESET – See Selecting preset codes directly on
page 76.
LEARNING – See Programming signals from other
remote controls on page 76.
MULTI OP – See Multi Operation and System Off on
page 78.
SYS OFF – See Multi Operation and System Off on
page 78.
DIRECT F – See Direct function on page 78.
RENAME – See Renaming input source names on
page 78.
ERASE – See Erasing one of the remote control button
settings on page 77.
RESET – See Resetting the remote control presets on
page 77.
READ ID – See Confirming preset codes on page 77.
14 RECEIVER
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to
select the green commands above the number buttons
(ANALOG ATT, etc.)). Also use this button to set up
surround sound (page 8, page 39). With SHIFT, this
selects the MULTI-ZONE control (page 58), shown in the
display as RCV/Z2, RCV/Z3.
15 VOL +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
DISP – Switches between named station presets and
radio frequencies (page 37). Also used to display
RDS information (page 38).
16 MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
EON – Use to search for programs that are
broadcasting traffic or news information (page 38).
17 Receiver controls
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 31).
9 STATUS
Press to check selected receiver settings (page 74).
SBch – Use to select the surround/virtual back
channel mode (page 31).
10 MULTI OPE
Use this button to perform multi operations (page 78).
STEREO/F.S.SURR – Switches between the stereo
playback mode (page 30) and the Front Stage
Surround Advance mode (page 30).
11 SHIFT
Press to access the controls outlined in white boxes (for
example, INPUT SELECT
), or to display the currently
selected input source in the remote control LCD.
12 SOURCE
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the
receiver (see page 76 for more on this).
13 Character display (LCD)
This display shows information when transmitting
control signals.
The following commands are shown when you’re setting
the remote to control other components (see Controlling
the rest of your system on page 76):
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode
(page 29).
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to
switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and
Neo:6 options (page 28).
ADV.SURR – Use to switch between the various
surround modes (page 29).
18 PHASE – Press to switch on/off Phase Control or Full
Band Phase Control (page 10).
MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets
(page 31).
S.DIRECT – Press to select Auto Surround (page 28)
or Stream Direct (page 30) listening.
27
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 28 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
05
Listening to your system
Chapter 5:
Listening to your system
Standard surround sound
Important
• The listening modes and many features described in
this section may not be available depending on the
current source, settings and status of the receiver.
See Listening modes with different input signal
formats on page 92 for more on this.
Auto playback
The following modes provide basic surround sound for
stereo and multichannel sources.4
O O
.D S
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV. SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
RECEIVER
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this
receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option
is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.1
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV. SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
RECEIVER
• While listening to a source, press S.DIRECT (AUTO
SURR/STREAM DIRECT)2 for auto playback of a source.
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the
digital format indicators in the front panel display to see
how the source is being processed.3
• VSX-LX70 only – When listening to the FM Radio, the
Neural THX feature is selected automatically (see
Using Neural THX on page 36 for more on this).
Listening in surround sound
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in
surround sound. However, the options available will
depend on your speaker setup and the type of source
you’re listening to.
If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using
surround back channel processing on page 31.
• While listening to a source, press STANDARD
(STANDARD SURROUND).
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround
encoded, the proper decoding format will
automatically be selected and shows in the display.5
With two channel sources, you can select from:
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to movie sources
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to music sources6
• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME– Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to video games
• 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound
from the surround speakers is mono)
• Neo:6 CINEMA – 6.1 channel sound, especially
suited to movie sources
• Neo:6 MUSIC – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited
to music sources7
• Neural THX – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially
suited to music sources8
With multichannel sources, if you have connected
surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON, you
can select (according to format):
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available
when you’re using two surround back speakers)
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above
Note
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround sound below
for more on these decoding formats).
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones or select the multichannel analog inputs.
2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 30.
3 VSX-LX70 only – Neural THX is selected when Neural Music Direct is accessed with the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input. However, Stereo is selected when
a category other than Neural Music Direct is accessed.
4 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.
5 If surround back channel processing (page 31) is switched OFF, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if the Surround
back speaker setting on page 42 is set to anything but Normal (default)), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).
6 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension,
and Panorama. See Setting the Audio options on page 70 to adjust them.
7 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 70).
8 VSX-LX70 only – Neural THX can be selected with the FM input. Also, Neural THX can be selected with the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input.
28
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 29 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Listening to your system
• Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel
sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure
decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital
Surround EX)
• DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS-ES encoded sources
• DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS encoded sources
Using the Home THX modes
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by
THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX
is designed to make home theater audio sound more like
what you hear in a cinema.
Different THX options will be available depending on the
source and the setting for surround back channel
processing (see Using surround back channel processing
on page 31 for more on this).
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV. SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
RECEIVER
• Press THX (HOME THX) to select a listening mode.1
With two channel sources, press THX (HOME THX)
repeatedly to select a matrix-decoding process for the
THX CINEMA mode (see Listening in surround sound
above for an explanation of each process):
05
• THX MUSICMODE – Allows you to hear 7.1 channel
playback with 5.1 channel sources
• THX GAMES MODE – Allows you to hear 7.1 channel
playback from the output of a video game console
Using the Advanced surround effects
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety
of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced
Surround modes are designed to be used with film
soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music
sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks
to see which you like.
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV. SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
RECEIVER
• Press ADV.SURR (ADVANCED SURROUND)
repeatedly to select a listening mode.2
• ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic
soundtracks
• DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog
• SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of
special effects
• MONOFILM – Creates surround sound from mono
soundtracks
• ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
• EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field3
• 2 PRO LOGIC+THX
• TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both
mono and stereo TV sources
• Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
• THX GAMES MODE
With multichannel sources, press THX (HOME THX)
repeatedly to select from:
• ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games
• SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs
• CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound
• THX CINEMA – Gives you cinema-quality sound from
your home theatre system using all the speakers in
your setup
• ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock
and/or pop music
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX – Especially suited to
movie sources, this allows you to hear 7.1 channel
playback with 5.1 channel sources
• EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo
source, using all of your speakers
• THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
• UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources
• PHONES SURR. – When listening through
headphones, you can still get the effect of overall
surround.
• THX Select2 CINEMA – Allows you to hear 7.1
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
Note
1 • If you only have one surround back speaker connected, 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX, THX Select2 CINEMA, THX MUSICMODE and THX GAMES
MODE are not available. With 2-channel input signals, however, 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX can be selected.
• You can’t use the THX modes when headphones are connected.
2 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup. For more on
this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 31.
• If you press ADV.SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURR. mode will automatically be selected.
3 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources).
29
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 30 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
05
Listening to your system
• F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound
effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.1
Tip
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is
selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the
EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on
page 70.
FOCUS position (Recommend)
Front left
speaker
WIDE position
Front right
speaker
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
Listening in stereo
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source
through just the front left and right speakers (and
possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker
settings). Dolby Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro
multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo.
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV. SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
RECEIVER
• STEREO – The audio is heard with your surround
settings and you can still use the Midnight,
Loudness, and Tone functions.
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage Surround
Advance below for more on this.
• F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage Surround
Advance below for more on this.
Using Front Stage Surround Advance
The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to
create natural surround sound effects using just the front
speakers and the subwoofer.
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV. SURR
MCACC
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary
signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the
pure analog or digital sound source (see Stream direct
with different input signal formats on page 95).
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
• While listening to a source, press STEREO/F.S.SURR
for stereo playback.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
Using Stream Direct
S.DIRECT
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV. SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
RECEIVER
1 While listening to a source, press S.DIRECT (AUTO
SURR/STREAM DIRECT) to select the mode you want.
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel
display to see how the source is being processed.
• AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 28.
• DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the
settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker
setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic
calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual
mono, the input attenuator, and any sound delay and
hi-bit/hi-sampling settings. You will hear sources
according to the number of channels in the signal.
• PURE DIRECT – Analog and PCM sources are heard
without any digital processing.2 No sound is output
from the Speaker B in this mode.
RECEIVER
• While listening to a source, press STEREO/F.S.SURR
to select Front Stage Surround Advance modes.
• STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for more on
this.
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround
sound effect directed to the center of where the front
left and right speakers sound projection area
converges.
Note
1 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if Auto MCACC Setup is performed. For more on this, refer to Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8.
2 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM. Please select AUTO SURROUND or DIRECT if this is a problem.
30
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 31 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Listening to your system
Selecting MCACC presets
• Default setting: MEMORY 1
If you have calibrated your system for different listening
positions1, you can switch between settings to suit the
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting
(for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a
video game close to the TV).
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
S.DIRECT
RECEIVER
• While listening to a source, press MCACC (MCACC
POSITION).
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets2
or to switch calibration off. See Data Management on
page 48 to check and manage your current settings.
Choosing the input signal
You need to hook up a component to both analog and
digital inputs on the receiver to select between input
signals.3
DISP
CH
T.DISP
PHOTO
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
• PCM – Only PCM signals are output.5 The receiver
selects the first available signal in the following order:
HDMI; DIGITAL.
When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, 2 DIGITAL lights with
Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus decoding, 2 HD
lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding, DTS lights with DTS
or DTS-HD decoding, and WMA9 Pro lights to indicate
that a WMA9 Pro signal is being decoded.
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV. SURR
MCACC
05
Using surround back channel processing
• Default setting: SBch ON
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby
Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use
6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded
material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back
channel will be generated, but the material may sound
better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally
encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround
back channel processing off).
The table below indicates when you will hear the
surround back channel when playing various kinds of
sources (=Sound plays through surround back
speaker(s)).
T.DISP
PHOTO
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV. SURR
CH
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
STANDARD ADV. SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
• Press SIGNAL SEL (SIGNAL SELECT) to select the
input signal corresponding to the source component.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
• AUTO – This is the default setting. The receiver
selects the first available signal in the following order:
HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.
• ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.
• DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.
• Press SBch (SBch PROCESSING) repeatedly to cycle
the surround back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
• SBch ON – 6.1 or 7.1 decoding is always used (for
example, a surround back channel will be generated
for 5.1 encoded material)
• SBch AUTO – Automatically switches to 6.1 or 7.1
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example,
Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
• SBch OFF – Maximum 5.1 playback
• HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.4
Note
1 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system. These presets
can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39, either of
which you should have already completed.
2 • You can’t use these settings when MULTI CH IN is switched on, and they has no effect when headphones are connected.
• You can also press / to select the MCACC preset.
3 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96 kHz/24 bit) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats. With
other digital signal formats, set to ANALOG (the MULTI CH IN, TUNER, PHONO and iPod input functions are all fixed to ANALOG).
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections
(page 17) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.
4 When the HDMI option in Setting the Audio options on page 70 is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.
5 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.
31
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 32 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
05
Listening to your system
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode
When you’re not using surround back speakers,
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround
back channel through your surround speakers. You can
choose to listen to sources with no surround back
channel information, or if the material sounds better in
the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally
encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.1
The table indicates when you will hear the virtual
surround back channel (=Virtual surround back
channel is active).
Type of source
Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES 5.1 ch sources with
6.1 ch flagged
Dolby Digital/DTS and DVD-Audio 5.1 ch
sources
Dolby Digital/DTS/PCM and DVD-Audio stereo
sources
Analog 2-channel (stereo) sources
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/Dolby Digital
Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro encoded and
PCM 6.1 ch/7.1 ch sources
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro
(44.1 kHz/48 kHz) encoded and PCM 5.1 ch
sources
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/
DTS-EXPRESS/WMA9 Pro (88.2 kHz/96 kHz)
encoded 5.1 ch sources
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro
(44.1 kHz/48 kHz) encoded stereo sources
• VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used
(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)
• VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is
automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
• VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is
switched off
Standard / THX
SBch
Processing /
Virtual SB
mode
Multichannel
sources
ON


AUTO


ON


AUTO
c

Advanced
surround
Stereo sources
2 Pro Logic IIx

ON
AUTO

ON

AUTO
b
2 Pro Logic
a
b
a
Neo:6








ON

d
AUTO

d
ON

d
AUTO
c
d
ON
c
d
AUTO
c
d
ON
AUTO
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/
DTS-EXPRESS/WMA9 Pro (88.2 kHz/96 kHz)
encoded stereo sources
• Press SBch (SBch PROCESSING) repeatedly to cycle
the virtual surround back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:


a
b
d
d
ON
AUTO
a. Only applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.
b. Not applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.
c. Sound is output from the surround back speakers only when THX Select2 CINEMA, THX MUSICMODE or THX GAMES MODE is selected.
d. Advanced surround mode may not be available depending on the input signal.
Note
1 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the THX, stereo, Front Stage
Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected.
• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the Surr Back setting is set to NO in the Speaker Setting on
page 50.
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.
32
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 33 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Listening to your system
05
Using the genre synchronizing function
This feature automatically selects the most appropriate
Advanced Surround mode for the source currently being
played back on a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI
Control connected to this receiver via HDMI.1 For details
on HDMI Control, see About HDMI on page 55.
CD
CD-R
DVD
TV
DVR2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
HDMI
BD
TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
TUNER
SLEEP
DIMMER
SR+
GENRE
RECEIVER
ANALOG
ATT
• Press RECEIVER, and then press GENRE while the
source assigned to a genre is being played back.
The most appropriate Advanced Surround mode for the
source being played back is automatically selected.
Note
1 • This feature is available only when the source being played back is assigned to a genre. When the source has no genre assigned to, NO GENRE appears
showing that this feature is not available.
• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to ON. When OFF is selected, CANNOT SELECT appears showing that this feature is not available (see About HDMI
on page 55).
33
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 34 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
USB playback
06
Chapter 6:
USB playback
VSX-LX60 only (VSX-LX70 – See the separate manual for HOME MEDIA GALLERY)
Using the USB interface
Basic playback controls
1
It is possible to listen to two-channel audio using the
USB interface on the front of this receiver. Connect a
USB mass storage device2 as shown below.
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
2 Press USB (SHIFT+iPod) to switch to the USB input.
No USB appears in the OSD.
3 Connect your USB device.3
The USB terminal is located on the front panel.
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
AUDIO
SPEAKERS
PHONES
VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
BAND
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SIGNAL
SELECT
The following table shows the basic controls on the
remote for USB playback.
Button
What it does

Starts normal playback.

Pauses/unpauses playback.
/ Press and hold during playback to start
scanning.
/ Press to skip to previous/next track.
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat
Folder, Repeat One and Repeat All.
SB ch
STEREO/
PROCESSING F.S.SURR
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
(ST)
ENTER
SETUP
(TUNE)
(ST)
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle On
and Shuffle Off.
DIGITAL IN
RETURN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
This receiver
DISP
Press repeatedly to change the song playback
information displayed in the front panel display.
/
During playback, press to skip to previous/next
track; when browsing, press to move to
previous/next levels.
TOP
MENU
Press to select the ROOT folder list; when
browsing a ROOT folder list, press to switch the
ROOT folder list to the playback screen.
USB mass
storage device
Loading appears in the OSD as this receiver starts
recognizing the USB device connected. After the
recognition, a playback screen appears in the OSD and
playback starts automatically.4
USB
Play
-55dB
FLD004TRK0001
R e l a x Yo u r B o d y
Kevin Jackson
We a r e a l l o n e
WMA / 128Kbps
0:01
Folder/File number
Repeat or Shuffle
Song name
Artist name
Album name
Elapsed time
File format/Bit rate
List
You can also select and play back your favorite file from
the folder/file list displayed in the OSD. For details, see
Selecting a file from the folder/file list for playback below.
RETURN Press to switch the playback screen to the
folder/file list; when browsing a folder/file list,
press to return to the previous level.
Selecting a file from the folder/file list
for playback
The folder/file list displays folders and files stored on your
USB device hierarchically. You can select and play back
a file of your choice by using /// and ENTER.
Note
1 This includes playback of WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC files (except files with copy-protection or restricted playback).
2 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players (MP3 players)
of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer for USB playback.
• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of
data that may occur when connected to this receiver.
• With large amounts of data, it may take longer for the receiver to read the contents of a USB device.
3 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.
4 • If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver automatically skips to the next file playable.
• When the file currently being played back has no title assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the OSD instead; when neither the album name nor
the artist name is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.
• Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.
34
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 35 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
USB playback
06
1 Press RETURN to display the folder/file list for the
USB device connected.
U SB
Play
-55dB
FLD004TRK0001
R e l a x Yo u r B o d y
Kevin Jackson
We a r e a l l o n e
WMA / 128 Kbps
0:01
List
-55dB
USB
We ar e all one
[
[
[
[
[
01
02
03
04
05
R e l a x Yo u r B o d y . w m
The Color of Life...
Ain't Thang Wrong...
Oh My God.wma
Watcha Need.wma
E nter
]
]
]
]
]
Retur n
2 Press / to select the file you want to play back,
and then press ENTER to confirm your selection.
• Press RETURN to switch to the upper hierarchy of the
current folder or file.
• AAC (MPEG-4 Advanced Audio Coding) – Sampling
rates: 8 kHz to 48 kHz; Bit rates: 16 kbps to 384 kbps
(128 kbps or higher recommended); File extension:
.m4a; Apple lossless encoding: No
Other compatibility information
• VBR (variable bit rate) MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC
playback: Yes1
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) protection
compatible: Yes (DRM-protected audio files will not
play in this receiver).
About MPEG-4 AAC
Error
What it means
Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is at the core of the
MPEG-4 AAC standard, which incorporates MPEG-2
AAC, forming the basis of the MPEG-4 audio
compression technology. The file format and extension
used depend on the application used to encode the AAC
file. This unit plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes®
bearing the extension ‘.m4a’. DRM-protected files will
not play, and files encoded with some versions of
iTunes® may not play.
USB ERR1
The power requirements of the USB device
are too high for this receiver.
Apple and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
USB ERR2
The USB device is incompatible.
About WMA
USB ERR3
See USB interface (VSX-LX60 only) on page 88
for more on this error message.
• To switch to the previous/next folder or file within the
current hierarchy, press /.
Important
If a USB ERR message lights in the display, try following
the points below:
• Switch the receiver off, then on again.
• Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched
off.
• Select another input source (like DVD/CD), then
switch back to USB.
• Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the
device) for USB power.
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB
device is incompatible.
Compressed audio compatibility
Note that although most standard bit/sampling rate
combinations for compressed audio are compatible,
some irregularly encoded files may not play back. The list
below shows compatible formats for compressed audio
files:
• MP3 (MPEG-1/2/2.5 Audio Layer 3) – Sampling rates:
8 kHz to 48 kHz; Bit rates: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (128
kbps or higher recommended); File extension: .mp3
• WMA (Windows Media Audio) – Sampling rates:
8 kHz / 48 kHz; Bit rates: 5 kbps to 384 kbps (128 kbps
or higher recommended); File extension: .wma;
WMA9 Pro and WMA lossless encoding: No
The Windows Media logo printed on the box indicates
that this receiver can playback Windows Media Audio
content.
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers
to an audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation. This unit plays back WMA files
encoded using Windows Media Player bearing the
extension ‘.wma’. Note that DRM-protected files will not
play, and files encoded with some versions of Windows
Media Player may not play.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
About DRM
DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a
technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by
restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on
devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment)
used to record it. For detailed information, please see the
instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC
and/or software.
Note
1 Note that in some cases playback time will not be displayed correctly.
35
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 36 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Using the tuner
07
Chapter 7:
Using the tuner
Using Neural THX
Listening to the radio
VSX-LX70 only
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and
AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the
frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a
station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving
station presets on page 36 for more on how to do this.
This feature uses Neural Surround™ technology to
achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.
A
SYSTEM OFF
RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECT
D.ACCESS
CLASS
CLEAR
+10
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU 
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
TUNE
BAND
ST
CD
CD-R
DVD
TV
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
HDMI
BD
D
AUDIO SUBTITLE
DISP
E
HDD
DVD
CH
CH
T.DISP
PHOTO
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
STEREO/
F.S.SURR

RETURN
PROGRAM
PTY SEARCH GUIDE
TUNE
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
STANDARD ADV.SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
TV CONTROL
TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
TUNER
C
ST
ENTER
SETUP
DVR2
MUTE
B
DISC
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
TV VOL
INPUT
SELECT
TV CH
VOL
1
DIMMER
Tuning directly to a station
Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of the
station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply
enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on
the remote control.
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
SLEEP
The Neural THX mode can be selected also with the
STANDARD button.
REC STOP JUKEBOX
EON
MPX
SOURCE
See About Neural Surround on page 91 for more on this.
INFO
REC
TV/DTV
• While listening to FM radio, press S.DIRECT for
Neural THX listening.
ANALOG
ATT
TV/DTV
REC
INFO
Press the TUNER button to select the tuner.
2 Use the BAND button to change the band (FM or
AM), if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
3 Tune to a station.
There are three ways to do this:
Automatic tuning
To search for stations in the currently selected band,
press and hold TUNE / for about a second. The
receiver will start searching for the next station,
stopping when it has found one. Repeat to search for
other stations.
Manual tuning
To change the frequency one step at a time, press
TUNE /.
High speed tuning
Press and hold TUNE / for high speed tuning.
Release the button at the frequency you want.
1
Press the TUNER button to select the tuner.
2 Use the BAND button to change the band (FM or
AM), if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
3
Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).
4 Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of
the radio station.
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.
Saving station presets
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s
convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for
easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.
This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This
receiver can memorize up to 30 stations, stored in three
banks, or classes (A, B and C) of 10 stations each. When
saving an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see page 36) is
also stored.
Improving FM stereo sound
If the TUNED or STEREO indicators don’t light when
tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press
the MPX button to switch the receiver into mono
reception mode. This should improve the sound quality
and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.
INFO
REC
TV/DTV
A
MUTE
SYSTEM OFF
RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECT
SOURCE
CLASS
CLEAR
+10
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU 
B
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
TUNE
BAND
SETUP
CD
CD-R
DVD
TV
DVR2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
SLEEP
HDMI
BD
TUNER
DIMMER
AUDIO SUBTITLE
D
DISP
E
HDD
DVD
CH
CH
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
ST

RETURN
ENTER
PROGRAM TUNE
PTY SEARCH GUIDE
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
STANDARD ADV.SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
TV CONTROL
TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
ST
C
DISC
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
REC STOP JUKEBOX
EON
MPX
D.ACCESS
TV VOL
RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECT
TV CH
VOL
RECEIVER
ANALOG
ATT
TV/DTV
REC
INFO
1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.
See Listening to the radio on page 36 for more on this.
36
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 37 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Using the tuner
2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).
The display shows STATION MEMORY, then a blinking
memory class.
3 Press CLASS to select one of the three classes then
press ST / to select the station preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a station
preset.
4 Press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop
blinking and the receiver stores the station.
Naming station presets
For easier identification, you can name your station
presets.
1 Choose the station preset you want to name.
See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.
07
Listening to station presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See
Saving station presets above if you haven’t done this
already.
1
Press TUNER to select the tuner.
2 Press CLASS to select the class in which the station
is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.
3 Press ST / to select the station preset you
want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote
control to recall the station preset.
An introduction to RDS
2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).
The display shows STATION NAME, then a blinking
cursor at the first character position.
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM
radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of
information—the name of the station and the kind of
show they’re broadcasting, for example.
3 Input the name you want.
Choose from the following characters for a name up to
four characters long.
One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of
program. For example, you can search for a station that’s
broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789
!”#$%&’()∗+,–./:;<=>[email protected][ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]
Use / to select a character, / to set the position,
and ENTER to confirm your selection.
Tip
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3
and input four spaces instead of a name.
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press
DISP when listening to a station to switch the display
between name and frequency.
You can search the following program types:1
NEWS – News
AFFAIRS – Current Affairs
INFO – General Information
SPORT – Sport
EDUCATE – Educational
DRAMA – Radio plays, etc.
CULTURE – National or
regional culture, theater,
etc.
SCIENCE – Science and
technology
VARIED – Usually talkbased material, such as
quiz shows or interviews.
POP M – Pop music
ROCK M – Rock music
EASY M – Easy listening
LIGHT M – ‘Light’ classical
music
CLASSICS – ‘Serious’
classical music
OTHER M – Music not
fitting above categories
WEATHER – Weather
reports
FINANCE – Stock market
reports, commerce,
trading, etc.
CHILDREN – Programs for
children
SOCIAL – Social affairs
RELIGION – Programs
concerning religion
PHONE IN – Public
expressing their views by
phone
TRAVEL – Holiday-type
travel rather than traffic
announcements
LEISURE – Leisure interests
and hobbies
JAZZ – Jazz
COUNTRY – Country music
NATION M – Popular
music in a language other
than English
OLDIES – Popular music
from the ’50s and ’60s
FOLK M – Folk music
DOCUMENT – Documentary
Note
1 In addition, there are three other program types, ALARM, NO DATA and NO TYPE. ALARM is used for emergency announcements. You can’t search
for these, but the tuner will switch automatically to this RDS broadcast signal. NO DATA and NO TYPE appears when a program type cannot be found.
37
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 38 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Using the tuner
07
Searching for RDS programs
One of the most useful features of RDS is the ability to
search for a particular kind of radio program. You can
search for any of the program types listed on the previous
page.
DISC
CLEAR
+10
MPX
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
ST
SETUP
DISP
ST
ENTER
C
AUDIO SUBTITLE
TUNE
BAND

RETURN
PROGRAM TUNE
REC STOP JUKEBOX
EON
B
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU 
D
DVD
CH
CH
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
E
HDD
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV. SURR
PTY SEARCH GUIDE
TV CONTROL
1
MCACC
S.DIRECT
Using EON
When EON (Enhanced Other Network information) is
turned on, the receiver jumps to an EON-linked
broadcast when it begins, even if a receiver function
other than the tuner is being used. It can’t be used in
areas that EON information isn’t transmitted and when
FM broadcast stations don’t transmit PTY data. When the
broadcast ends, the tuner returns to the original
frequency or function.
DISC
CLEAR
+10
Press the BAND button to select the FM band.1
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU 
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
INFO
REC
TV/DTV
A
MUTE
TUNE
MPX
2 Press the PTY SEARCH button.
SEARCH shows in the display.
3 Press ST / to select the program type you
want to hear.
4 Press ENTER to search for the program type.
The system starts searching through the station presets
for a match. When it finds one, the search stops and the
station plays for five seconds.
5 If you want to keep listening to the station, press
ENTER within the five seconds.
If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes.
If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner couldn’t find
that program type at the time of the search.2
BAND
SETUP
ST
ST
ENTER
PROGRAM TUNE
PTYSEARCH GUIDE
1

RETURN
EON
B
C
REC STOP JUKEBOX
AUDIO SUBTITLE
DISP
PHOTO
D
E
HDD
DVD
CH
CH
T DISP
Press the BAND button to select the FM band.4
2 Press EON to select one of the possible modes.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
• EON TA (Traffic Announcement) – Sets the tuner to
pick up traffic information when it is broadcast.
• EON NEWS – Sets the tuner to pick up news when it
is broadcast.
When set to TA or NEWS, the EON indicator in the
display lights (it flashes when receiving an EON
broadcast).5 The indicator in the display lights when
the current station carries the EON service.6
Displaying RDS information
Use the DISP button to display the different types of RDS
information available.3
• Press DISP for RDS information.
Each press changes the display as follows:
• Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station.
For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone
number as RT.
• Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio
station.
• Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of
program currently being broadcast.
• Current tuner frequency
Note
1 RDS is only possible in the FM band.
2 RDS searches station presets only. If no stations have been preset, or if the program type could not be found among the station presets NO PTY is
displayed. FINISH means the search is complete.
3 • If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.
• If you see NO RADIO TEXT DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station. The display will automatically switch to the
PS data display (if no PS data, the frequency is displayed).
• In the PTY display, NO DATA may be shown. In this case, the PS display is shown after a few seconds.
4 EON is only possible in the FM band.
5 You can’t search for traffic announcements and news at the same time.
6 • You cannot operate the TUNER EDIT and PTY SEARCH buttons while the EON indicator in the display is lit.
• If you want to change to a function other than the tuner when the EON indicator is flashing, press EON MODE to turn EON off.
38
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 39 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
The System Setup menu
08
Chapter 8:
The System Setup menu
Making receiver settings from the
System Setup menu
The following section shows you how to make detailed
settings to specify how you’re using the receiver (for
example, if you want to set up two speaker systems in
separate rooms), and also explains how to fine-tune
individual speaker system settings to your liking.
SYSTEM OFF
RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECT
D.ACCESS
SOURCE
CLASS
CLEAR
+10
DISC
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
TUNE
BAND
ST
ST
ENTER
SETUP
RETURN
PROGRAM TUNE
PTY SEARCH GUIDE
TV CONTROL
CD
CD-R
DVD
TV
DVR2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
HDMI
BD
TV CTRL
TUNER
RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECT
TV VOL
REC
TV/DTV
SLEEP
TV CH
VOL
ZONE2/3
DIMMER
ANALOG
INFO
A
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the  RECEIVER button to switch on.1
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,
disconnect them.
2 Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press
the SETUP button.2
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the
/// buttons and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
• Press SETUP at any time to exit the System Setup
menu.
3
Select the setting you want to adjust.
DV D/LD
- 55.0dB
S ystem S etup ME NU
1. Auto MCACC
2. S ur r Back S ystem
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND P HAS E CTRL
5. Data Manag ement
6. Manual S P S etup
7. Input S etup
8. Other S etup
• Surr Back System – Specifies how you are using your
surround back speakers (see Surround back speaker
setting on page 42).
• Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings
and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see
Manual MCACC setup on page 42).
• FULL BAND PHASE CTRL – Calibrates and
automatically corrects the frequency-phase
characteristics of the speakers connected (see Full
Band Phase Control on page 47).
• Data Management – Checks your MCACC presets
and manages them through copying, renaming or
deleting (see Data Management on page 48).
• Manual SP Setup – Specifies the size, number,
distance and overall balance of the speakers you’ve
connected (see Manual speaker setup on page 50).
• Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to
the digital, HDMI, component video and S-video
inputs (see The Input Setup menu on page 66).
• Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect
how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup
menu on page 67).
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those
provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound
(MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8, you can
customize your setup options below. You can calibrate
your system differently for up to six different MCACC
presets3, which are useful if you have different listening
positions depending on the type of source (for example,
watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game
close to the TV).4
:E xit
• Auto MCACC – See Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
on page 8 for a quick and effective automatic
surround setup. See Automatic MCACC (Expert)
below for a more detailed setup.
Note
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.
2 • Note that when editing items in the Manual MCACC menu, you will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing MCACC
before pressing SETUP.
• You can’t use the System Setup menu when the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only) input source is selected (in either
the main or sub zone). When you set ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to ON (page 60), you can’t use the System Setup menu.
3 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1–6 (or M1–6) until you rename them in Data Management on page 48.
4 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.
39
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 40 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
08
The System Setup menu
Important
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved
during the Auto MCACC Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.1
• The screen saver will automatically appear after three
minutes of inactivity.
Caution
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are
output at high volume.
1 Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the System Setup menu
then press ENTER.
If the System Setup screen is not displayed, refer to
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
above.
DV D/LD
- 55.0dB
Sy stem S etup ME NU
1. Auto MCACC
2. S ur r Back S ystem
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND P HAS E CTRL
5. Data Manag ement
6. Manual S P S etup
7. Input S etup
8. Other S etup
:E xit
DVD/LD
- 55 . 0dB
1. Auto MCACC
S ur r Back S ystem
[Nor mal (default)]
S ave S Y MME TRY to
[M1. ME MORY 1
]
S TART
E NTE R:S tar t
:Canc e l
2 Make sure ‘Normal (default)’ is selected,2 select an
MCACC preset3 then select START.4
For a fully customized Auto MCACC setup, select
CUSTOM and set the following parameters using /:5
- 55.0 dB
DVD/LD
1 . Auto M CACC
Output Se tup
[Norma l (de fault)]
Sav e SYM M ETRY to
[ M 1 . MEMORY 1
]
CUSTOM
ENTER:Nex t
: Cancel
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Custom Menu
ALL
- 55.0 dB
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro. & S-Wave
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
ENTER:Next
: Return
DVD/LD
- 55.0 dB
1. Auto MCACC
SYMMETRY
M1.MEMORY 1
ALL CH ADJ
[ M2.MEMORY 2 ]
FRONT ALIGN
[ M3.MEMORY 3 ]
THX Speaker
[ NO ]
[ START ]
ENTER:Star t
: Return
• Custom Menu – The default is ALL (recommended),
but you can limit the system calibration to only one
setting (to save time) if you want.6 The available
options are ALL, Keep SP SYSTEM,7 Speaker
Setting, Channel Level, Speaker Distance and EQ
Pro. & S-Wave.
• EQ Type (only available when the Custom Menu
above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – This determines how
the frequency balance is adjusted.
After a single calibration is performed, each of the
following three correction curves can be stored
separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY (default)
implements symmetric correction for each pair of left
and right speakers to flatten the frequency amplitude
characteristics. ALL CH ADJUST is a ‘flat’ setting where
all the speakers are set individually so no special
weighting is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN8
sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker
settings (no equalization is applied to the front left and
right channels).
• THX Speaker (only available when the Custom Menu
above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES if you
are using THX speakers (set all speakers to SMALL),
otherwise leave it set to NO.
• Stand.Wave Multi-Point (only available when the
Custom Menu above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – In
addition to measurements at the listening position,
you can use two more reference points for which test
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is
useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration
for several seating positions in your listening area.9
Place the microphone at the reference point
indicated on-screen and note the last microphone
placement will be at your main listening position:
2nd reference
point
3rd reference
point
1
2
3
Main listening
position
When you’re finished settings the options, press
RETURN to go back to the Auto MCACC main setup.
Note
1 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the CUSTOM setup screen (step 2).
2 If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker setting
on page 42 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 3.
3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can
rename it later in Data Management on page 48).
4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJUST and
FRONT ALIGN).
5 Select DEMO, and then press ENTER to activate the demo mode of Auto MCACC. In the demo mode, no settings are saved and no errors occur. When
the speakers are connected to this receiver, the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone.
6 • The EQ Pro. & S-Wave measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 45 for more on this.
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For details, see
Setting the Audio options on page 70.
• The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Full Band Phase Control on page 47.
7 The Keep SP SYSTEM option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 50) unchanged.
8 If you selected ALL as your Custom Menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN settings.
9 Switch the Multi-Point setting OFF if you only use one listening position.
40
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 41 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
The System Setup menu
3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
AUDIO
SPEAKERS
PHONES
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
BAND
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SIGNAL
SELECT
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 7.
SB ch
STEREO/
PROCESSING F.S.SURR
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
(ST)
SETUP
ENTER
(TUNE)
(ST)
RETURN
DIGITAL IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position.
Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a
table or a chair.
4
08
Follow the instructions on-screen.
• Make sure the microphone is connected.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically
detected every time you switch on the system. Make
sure it is on and the volume is turned up.
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on
page 9 for notes regarding high background noise
levels and other possible interference.
5 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish
outputting test tones.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
it’s doing this.
DV D/ L D
1. Auto MCACC
Now An a ly z i n g …
0 . 0dB
( 2/11)
E nv i ro n me n t Ch e ck
Amb i e n t No i s e
Mi c ro p h o n e
S p e a k e r Y E S / NO
6 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in
the OSD.1
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.
0 . 0dB
OK
:Ca n c e l
10:Next
:Ca n c e l
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the
power and check the speaker connections. If there
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use /
to select the speaker and / to change the setting
(and number for surround back) and continue.
7 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker
distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.
DV D/ L D
1 . Au to MCACC
Now An a ly z i n g …
0 . 0dB
S u b wo o fe r Ch e ck
• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This
may result in incorrect speaker settings.
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise! or Check Microphone) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 9) and verifying
the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a
problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and
continue.
[ OK ]
[
]
[
]
DV D/ L D
1 . Au to MCACC
CHE CK
F ro n t
[ YES ]
Ce n te r
[ YES ]
S u rr
[ YES ]
SB
[ YESx2]
SW
[ YES ]
DV D/ L D
- 5 5 . 0dB
1 . Au to MCACC
Now An a ly z i n g … ( 6 / 1 1 )
S u rro u n d
Speaker
Ch a n n e l
Speaker
An a ly s i s
S y s te m
[ OK ]
L ev e l
[ OK ]
Di s ta n c e [
]
:Ca n c e l
:Ca n c e l
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
• If you selected a Stand.Wave Multi-Point setup (in
step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd
and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at
your main listening position.
8 The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press RETURN
to go back to the System Setup menu.
DV D/ L D
- 5 5 . 0dB
5 a . MCACC Da ta Ch e ck
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
S p e a k e r S e tti n g
Ch a n n e l L ev e l
S p e a k e r Di s ta n c e
S ta n d i n g Wav e
Ac o u s ti c Ca l E Q
F UL L BAND P HAS E CT RL
E NT E R:Nex t
:Re tu rn
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
System Setup menu (starting on page 39).2
Note
1 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting in Custom Menu from the Auto MCACC CUSTOM menu.
2 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings.
You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 50.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
41
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 42 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
The System Setup menu
08
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting
individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check
screen:
• Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers
you’ve connected (see page 50 for more on this)
• Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker
system (see page 43 or 51 for more on this)
• Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers
from the listening position (see page 44 or 51 for
more on this)1
• Standing Wave – Filter settings to control lower
‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 44 for more on this)
• Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the frequency
balance of your speaker system based on the
acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 45
for more on this)
• FULL BAND PHASE CTRL – The original
characteristics of group delay of the speakers
calibrated and the targeted characteristics can be
displayed graphically (see Full Band Phase Control on
page 47 for more on this).
Press ENTER after you have finished checking each
screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back
to the System Setup menu.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.
Surround back speaker setting
• Default setting: Normal (default)
There are several ways you can use the surround back
speaker channels with this system. In addition to a
normal home theater setup where they are used for the
surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping
the front speakers or as an independent speaker system
in another room.
1 Select ‘Surr Back System’ from the System Setup
menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
above if you’re not already at this screen.
DV D/LD
- 55.0dB
Sy stem S etup ME NU
1. Auto MCACC
2. S ur r Back S ystem
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND P HAS E CTRL
5. Data Manag ement
6. Manual S P S etup
7. Input S etup
8. Other S etup
:E xit
2
DV D/LD
- - .- dB
2. Surr Back System
Nor mal (default)
Front
Center
S ur r
SB
• Speaker B – Select to use the (surround back) B
speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in
another room (see Speaker B setup on page 56).
• Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re biamping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your front
speakers on page 57).
• ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back) B
speaker terminals for an independent system in
another zone (see MULTI-ZONE listening on page 58).
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
Manual MCACC setup
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup
menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more
familiar with the system. Before making these settings,
you should have already completed Automatically setting
up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
on page 8.
You only need to make these settings once (unless you
change the placement of your current speaker system or
add new speakers).
Caution
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at
high volume.
Important
• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you
want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing
SETUP (step 2 in Making receiver settings from the
System Setup menu on page 39). When Manual
MCACC is selected while MCACC is set to OFF, the
selection screen for the MCACC memory appears.
Select a memory to adjust manually.
DV D/ L D
- 5 5 . 0dB
3 . Ma nu a l MCACC
S e l e c t MCACC me mo r y.
MCACC OF F
M1 . ME MORY 1
E NT E R:Nex t
:Ca n c e l
:Nor mal
:Nor mal
:Nor mal
:Nor mal
:Finish
Select the surround back speaker setting.
• Normal (default) – Select for normal home theater
use with surround back speakers in your main
(speaker system A) setup.
Note
1 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal surround
sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.
42
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 43 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
The System Setup menu
08
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect
the setup microphone to the front panel and place it
about ear level at your normal listening position.
Press SETUP to display the System Setup menu
before you connect the microphone to this receiver. If
the microphone is connected while the System Setup
menu is not being displayed, the display will change
to the Auto MCACC setup menu. See Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 9 for notes
regarding high background noise levels and other
possible interference.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up
the volume to the middle position.
1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the System Setup
menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
on page 39 if you’re not already at this screen.
DVD /L D
- 55.0dB
Syst em S etup ME NU
1. Au t o MCACC
2. Su rr Back S ystem
3. M anu al MCACC
4. F U L L BAND P HAS E CTRL
5. D at a Manag ement
6. M anu al S P S etup
7. In p u t S etup
8. Ot h er S etup
:E xit
DV D/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 55.0dB
Fine Channel Level
Fine S P Distance
S tanding Wave
E Q Adjust
E Q P rofessional
:Retur n
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to
make these settings in order.
• Fine Ch Level – Make fine adjustments to the overall
balance of your speaker system (see Fine Channel
Level below).
• Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for
your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on
page 44).
• Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low
frequencies in your listening room (see Standing
Wave on page 44).
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the
parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
on page 45:
• EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance
of your speaker system while listening to test tones
(see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 45).
• EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on
the direct sound coming from the speakers and make
detailed settings according to your room’s reverb
characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional on page 45).
Fine Channel Level
• Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
You can achieve better surround sound by properly
adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. The
following setting can help you make detailed
adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual
speaker setup on page 50.
1 Select ‘Fine Ch Level’ from the Manual MCACC
setup menu.
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.
DV D/ L D
3 . Ma nu a l MCACC
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 5 5 . 0dB
DV D/ L D
- 2 0 . 0dB
3 a . F i n e Ch a n n e l L ev e l
F i n e Ch a n n e l L ev e l
F i n e S P Di s ta n c e
S ta n d i n g Wav e
E Q Ad j u s t
E Q P ro fe s s i o n a l
Please wait... 20
CAUT I ON
Loud test tones will
be output.
:Ca n c e l
:Re tu rn
2 Adjust the level of the left channel.
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want
to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty
of room to adjust the other speaker levels.
DV D/ L D
0 . 0 dB
3 a . F i n e Ch a n n e l L ev e l
MCACC : M1 . ME MORY 1
Re f. Ch : L
+0.5dB
E NT E R:Nex t
:Ca n c e l
• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels
(+/–10dB) as necessary.
Use / to adjust the volume of the speaker you
selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds
like both tones are the same volume, press  to confirm
and continue to the next channel.
DV D/ L D
3 a . F i n e Ch a n n e l L ev e l
R
L
L
R
C
SL
SR
0 . 0dB
+0.5dB
-1 . 5 d B S BL [ -9 . 5 d B ]
[ + 1 . 0 d B ] SBR[+10.0dB ]
[ -9 . 5 d B ] S W [ -1 . 5 d B ]
[ +10.0dB ]
:F i n i s h
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will
change depending on which speaker you select.
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply
use / to select it.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
43
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 44 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
08
The System Setup menu
Fine Speaker Distance
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply
use / to select it.
• Default setting: 3.00 m (all speakers)
For proper sound depth and separation with your system,
it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some
speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening
position at the same time. The following setting can help
you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve
using the Manual speaker setup below.
1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC
setup menu.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 55.0dB
Fine Channel Level
Fine S P Distance
S tanding Wave
E Q Adjust
E Q P rofessional
:Retur n
DV D/LD
0 . 0dB
3b. Fine S P Distance
MCACC : M1. MEMORY 1
Ref.Ch : L
3.00 m
E NTE R:Next
:Canc e l
2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the
listening position.
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance
as necessary.
Use / to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected
to match the reference speaker. The delay is measured in
terms of speaker distance from 0.01 to 9.00 meters.
DVD/LD
3b. Fine S P Distance
SL
L
3.05 m
L
R
[2.81 m]
C
1.92 m ]
SL
[2.23 m]
[2.34 m]
SR
0.0dB
DV D/LD
3b. Fine S P Distance
S BL
SL
S BL
S BR
SW
0 . 0dB
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Standing Wave
• Default setting: ON2
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain
conditions, sound waves from your speaker system
resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the
walls in your listening area. This can have a negative
effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your
listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room,
it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The
Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of
overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During
playback of a source, you can customize the filters used
for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC
presets.3
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC
setup menu.
DV D/ L D
3 . Ma nu a l MCACC
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 5 5 . 0dB
F i n e Ch a n n e l L ev e l
F i n e S P Di s ta n c e
S ta n d i n g Wav e
E Q Ad j u s t
E Q P ro fe s s i o n a l
1.92 m
[1.83 m]
[2.34 m]
:Re tu rn
:Finish
:Fini s h
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the
target channel. From the listening position, face the two
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each
speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of
you and between your arm span.1
- 5 5 . 0dB
DV D/ L D
3c. Standing Wave
MCACC : M1. MEMORY 1
Filter Ch
TRIM
No.
f [
Q [
ATT [
SW
[ +12.0 dB ]
1
2
3
63 Hz ] [ 110 Hz ] [ 250 Hz ]
3.0 ] [ 8.0 ] [ 5.0 ]
2.5 dB ] [ 6.0 dB ] [ 6.0 dB ]
:Finish
2 Select ‘ON’ (if it is not already selected) then adjust
the parameters for the Standing Wave Control.
• Filter Ch – Select the channel to which you will apply
the filter(s): Main (all except center channel and
subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).
• TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is
SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to
compensate for the difference in output post-filter).
• f / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where f
represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q
is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the
bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation (ATT, the
amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up,
press  to confirm and continue to the next channel.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will
change depending on which speaker you select.
Note
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be difficult to
compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).
2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave feature in the Audio Parameter menu. See Setting the Audio options on page 70 for more on this.
3 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset.
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.
• When Standing Wave is selected for a MCACC preset memory where S-WAVE is set to OFF in the Audio parameter, S-WAVE ON is automatically
selected.
44
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 45 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
The System Setup menu
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room
equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It
works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your
room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that
can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’
equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the
adjustment provided in Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on
page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39, you can
also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency
balance that suits your tastes.1
1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup
menu.
DV D/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 55.0dB
Fine Channel Level
Fine S P Distance
S tanding Wave
E Q Adjust
E Q P rofessional
:Retur n
2 Confirm that the MCACC preset shown in the
display is the one you want to adjust, then select
START.
- 55.0dB
DV D/LD
3d. EQ Adjust
MCACC:M1. MEMORY 1
[ START ]
ENTER:Next
:Cancel
3 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your
liking.
- 5 5 . 0 dB
:Finish
TRM
63
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
8k
16k
DV D / L D
3d. EQ Adjust
M C AC C : M 1
Ch
[SBL]
dB
63Hz [
125Hz [
250Hz [
500Hz [
1kHz
2kHz [
4kHz [
8kHz [
16kHz [
TRIM [
0.0]
0.0]
0.0]
0.0]
0.0
-1.0]
-2.0]
-4.5]
-7.0]
0.0]
Use the / buttons to select the channel.
Use the / buttons to select the frequency and /
to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to
the top of the screen and use the / buttons to select
the next channel.
08
Tip
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too
drastically will affect the overall balance. If the
speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or
lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM
feature. Use / to select TRIM then use / to
raise or lower the channel level for the current
speaker.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room
reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It
can also provide you with a graphical output of the
frequency response of your room.2
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant
in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that
different channels seem to exhibit different reverb
characteristics, select EQ Pro. & S-Wave (or ALL) for the
Custom Menu setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 39 to calibrate the room automatically. This should
provide a balanced calibration that suits the
characteristics of your listening room.
If you still aren’t satisfied with the results, the manual
Advanced EQ setup (below) provides a more customized
calibration of your system using the direct sound of the
speakers. This is done with the help of a graphical output
that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer
(with software available from Pioneer — see Connecting
a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 63).
How to interpret the graphical output
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time (in
milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line
indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a
sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when
outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually
flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this
usually takes about 100 ms or so).
• The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the
frequency adjustment is too drastic and might
distort. If this happens, bring the level down until
OVER! disappears from the display.
Note
1 When EQ Adjust is selected for a MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the Audio parameter, EQ ON is automatically selected.
2 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer
(with software available from Pioneer—see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 63 for more on this).
45
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 46 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
08
The System Setup menu
• Reverb characteristics for different channels –
Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for
each channel. Since this difference increases as the
sound is influenced by the various room
characteristics, it is often better to capture a
frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of
channel frequencies/sounds.
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how
your room is responding to certain frequencies.
Differences in channel level and speaker distance are
taken into account automatically (compensation is
provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency
measurements can be examined both with and without
the equalization performed by this receiver.1
Setting Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
according to your room characteristics
Left
surround
Level
Right
Surround
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at
which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing
the time that is best for system calibration with your
particular room characteristics.
The graph below shows the difference between
conventional acoustic calibration and professional
calibration (the gray circle indicates the point where the
microphone captures sound during frequency analysis).
Level
Test tone
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
0
80
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
0
Time
(in msec.)
Conventional Acoustic Cal.
EQ calibration range
160
Time
(in msec.)
• Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies –
Depending on your room, you may find that lower
frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to
higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’).
This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the
measurement is done too late.
Low
frequencies
Level
High
frequencies
80
160
Note that changing the room (for example, moving
furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results.
In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
1
0
80
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often
not necessary to make a 30~50ms setting. Later time
settings may provide a more detailed sound experience
with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what
works best for your particular room.
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it
is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls,
furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner
the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the
room. We recommend an earlier time setting of
30~50ms to compensate for two major factors that will
influence the sound of most rooms:
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
Conventional Acoustic Cal.
EQ calibration range
Conventional Acoustic Cal.
EQ calibration range
160
Time
(in msec.)
Select ‘EQ Professional’ then press ENTER.
DV D/ L D
3 . Ma nu a l MCACC
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 5 5 . 0dB
F i n e Ch a n n e l L ev e l
F i n e S P Di s ta n c e
S ta n d i n g Wav e
E Q Ad j u s t
E Q P ro fe s s i o n a l
:Re tu rn
2
DV D/ L D
3 e . E Q P ro fe s s i o n a l
- 5 5 . 0dB
1 . Rev e rb Me a s u re me n t
2 . Rev e rb V i ew
3 . Adva n c e d E Q S e tu p
e . E Q P ro fe s s i o n a l
E NT E R:Nex t
:Re tu rn
Select an option and press ENTER.
• Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the
reverb characteristics of your room (for graphical
output using a PC, see Connecting a PC for Advanced
MCACC output on page 63 to connect an RS-232C
cable before selecting this option).
• Reverb View – You can check the reverb
measurements made for specified frequency ranges
in each channel.
• Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time
period that will be used for frequency adjustment and
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of
your listening area. Note that customizing system
calibration using this setup will alter the settings you
made in Automatically setting up for surround sound
(MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 or
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39 and is not
necessary if you’re satisfied with these settings.
Note
1 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most obvious when
comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.
46
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 47 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
The System Setup menu
08
3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ
ON or OFF and then START.
DVD /L D
- 55.0dB
3e1. R eve r b Measur ement
MCACC : M1. ME MORY 1
DV D/LD
0.0dB
3e1. Reverb Measurement
Now Analyzing …
( 2/ 5)
R everb Measur e with
E Q OFF
E nvironment Check
Ambient Noise
Microphone
S peaker Level
[ S tar t ]
:Cancel
[ OK]
[
]
[
]
DV D/ L D
- 5 5 . 0dB
3e3 . Adv. EQ Setup (1/2)
Ch
L
Fq
[ 125H z ]
T m [3 0- 5 0 ms ]
dB
:Cancel
The following options determine how the reverb
characteristics of your listening area are displayed in
Reverb View and Output PC (Data Management):
• EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of
your listening area without the equalization
performed by this receiver (before calibration).
• EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of
your listening area with the equalization performed
by this receiver (after calibration).1 Note that the EQ
response may not appear entirely flat due to
adjustments necessary for your listening area.
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select
Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 86
for troubleshooting information.
4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the
reverb characteristics for each channel. Press
RETURN when you’re done.
DV D / L D
3 e 2 . R ev e r b V i ew
M1 : EQ OFF
Ch
L
Fq [
dB
0
best to use the measurement results as a reference for
your time setting. For an optimal system calibration
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we
recommend using the 30~50ms setting.
80
- 5 5 . 0 dB
125Hz ]
160ms
:Return
This appears according to the setting you chose in
Reverb Measurement (step 3 above). Use the /
buttons to select the channel and the frequency you want
to check. Use the / buttons to go back and forth
between the two. Note that the markers on the vertical
axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps.
5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, enter the
desired time setting for calibration. Press  to
proceed to the next screen, and then select START.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can
choose the time period that will be used for the final
frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you
can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is
0
80
DV D/ L D
- 5 5 . 0dB
3 e 3 . Adv. E Q S e tu p (2 / 2 )
MCACC :M1 . ME MORY 1
E Q Ty p e
SYMMETRY
S ta n d . Wav e Mu l ti -Po i n t
[ NO ]
160ms
:Ca n c e l
[ S TART ]
: Ca n c e l
Use the / buttons to select the channel, frequency,
and time setting. Use the / buttons to switch
between them.
You can switch between your connected speakers
(excluding the subwoofer), and display the
measurements for the following frequencies: 63Hz,
125Hz, 250Hz, 500Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz, 4kHz, 8kHz and
16kHz.
Select the setting from the following time periods (in
milliseconds): 0~20ms, 10~30ms, 20~40ms, 30~50ms,
40~60ms, 50~70ms and 60~80ms. This setting will be
applied to all channels during calibration.
When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2
to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are
given the option to check the settings on-screen.
Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the
frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers
connected and corrects the phase distortion. This
receiver analyzes the frequency-phase characteristics of
the speakers by calibrating test signals output from the
speakers with the supplied microphone, therefore
flattening the analyzed frequency-phase characteristics
during audio signal playback. This correction minimizes
group delay between the middle- and low-frequency
ranges and improves the frequency-phase
characteristics across all ranges. Furthermore, the
enhanced frequency-phase characteristics between
channels ensure better surround sound integration for
multichannel sources. For details, see Using Full Band
Phase Control on page 11.
This section describes how to calibrate the frequencyphase characteristics of the speakers only. Once you
have performed calibration with Auto MCACC set as a
default setting or with CUSTOM set to ALL, the Full Band
Phase Control calibration is already done (In this case,
the previous settings are overwritten if you perform
calibration again as described here).
Note
1 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset, exit the
System Setup menu and press MCACC to select it before pressing SETUP.
47
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 48 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
The System Setup menu
08
1 Select ‘FULL BAND PHASE CTRL’ from the System
Setup menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
above if you’re not already at this screen.
DVD/LD
- 55.0dB
Sy stem S etup ME NU
1. Auto MCACC
2. S ur r Back S ystem
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND P HAS E CTRL
5. Data Manag ement
6. Manual S P S etup
7. Input S etup
8. Other S etup
:E xit
2
DV D/LD
- 55 . 0dB
4. FULL BAND PAS E CTRL
a. Measur ement
b. Group Delay V iew
E NTE R:Next
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets,
allowing you to calibrate your system for different
listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the
same listening position).3 This is useful for alternate
settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to
and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies
from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).
:Retu rn
Select an option and press ENTER.
• Measurement – Calibrates and corrects the
frequency-phase characteristics of each speaker.
• Group Delay View – The original characteristics of
group delay of the speakers calibrated and the
targeted characteristics can be displayed
graphically.
3
Data Management
From this menu you can check your current settings,
copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier
identification and clear any ones you don’t need.
1 Select ‘Data Management’ from the System Setup
menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
above if you’re not already at this screen.
DV D/ L D
- 5 5 . 0dB
S y s te m S e tu p ME NU
1 . Au to MCACC
2 . S u rr Ba ck S y s te m
3 . Ma nu a l MCACC
4 . F UL L BAND P HAS E CT RL
5 . Da ta Ma n ag e me n t
6 . Ma nu a l S P S e tu p
7 . I n p u t S e tu p
8 . Oth e r S e tu p
If you selected ‘Measurement’, press ENTER.
DV D/LD
4 a. Measur ement
- 55.0dB
FULL BAND P HAS E CTRL
Measur ement
[ S TART
DVD/LD
4a. Measur ement
Now Analyzing …
0 . 0dB
( 5/ 5 )
FULL BAND P HAS E CTRL
Delay Check
[ OK]
Group Delay
[
]
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 5 5 . 0dB
MCACC Da ta Ch e ck
Me mo r y Re n a me
MCACC Me mo r y Co py
MCACC Me mo r y Cl e a r
O u tp u t P C
:E x i t
:Re tu rn
]
2
ENTE R:S tar t
DV D/ L D
5 . Da ta Ma n ag e me n t
:Cancel
E NTE R:S tar t
:Canc e l
When the Full Band Phase Control measurement is
finished, you can select Group Delay View to see the
results on-screen.
4 If you selected ‘Group Delay View’, you can check
the graph showing the group delay characteristics.
Press RETURN then you’re done.1
- 55.0dB
DV D/LD
4b. Group Delay V iew
Or iginal & Targ et
Channel
Front
Tgt
ms
^
^
^
Org
Hz
Targeted characteristics
after correction
Original characteristics
of the speakers calibrated
:Retur n
This appears according to the setting you chose in
Measurement (Step 2 above). Use / to select the
channel you want to check.2
Select the setting you want to adjust.
• MCACC Data Check – Check the settings for any of
your MCACC presets using the on-screen display
(see Checking MCACC preset data below).
• Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for
easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets
below).
• MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from one
MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC
preset data below).
• MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets
that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets
below).
• Output PC – See Connecting a PC for Advanced
MCACC output on page 63 for more on this.
Checking MCACC preset data
After you have completed Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on
page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39, you can
check your calibrated settings using the on-screen
display.
Note
1 When your PC is connected to this receiver, the original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of
group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on your PC.
2 The subwoofer is excluded from correction.The super tweeter in the super high-frequency range is excluded from correction. Also, speakers theoretically
unaffected by group delay (full-range speakers, for instance) are excluded from correction. Because calibration involves the spatial characteristics, you may
not get the same results after you perform calibration again depending on your audiovisual environment and your speaker system.
3 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39,
either of which you should have already completed.
48
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 49 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
The System Setup menu
08
1 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
DVD /L D
5. D at a M anag ement
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
DV D/LD
- 55.0dB
5a. MCACC Data Check
- 55.0dB
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
M C ACC Data Check
M emor y Rename
M C ACC Memor y Copy
M C ACC Memor y Clear
Ou t put P C
E NTE R:Next
:Retur n
2
S peaker S etting
Channel Level
S peaker Distance
S tanding Wave
Acoustic Cal E Q
FULL BAND P HAS E CTRL
:Retur n
Copying MCACC preset data
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration
EQ (see Manual MCACC setup above), we recommend
copying your current settings1 to an unused MCACC
preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a
reference point from which to start.
1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
Select the setting you want to check.
• It is useful to do this while a source is playing so you
can compare the different settings.
DV D/ L D
5 . Da ta Ma n ag e me n t
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3 Select the MCACC preset that you want to check.
Use the / buttons if necessary to switch speakers/
settings.
TRIM
63
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
8k
16k
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
Renaming MCACC presets
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re
using, you may want to rename them for easier
identification.
1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 55.0dB
M C ACC Data Check
M emor y Rename
M C ACC Memor y Copy
M C ACC Memor y Clear
Ou t put P C
:Retur n
DV D/LD
- 55.0dB
5b. Memor y Rename
MCACC Position Rename
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
[
[
[
[
[
ME MORY
ME MORY
ME MORY
ME MORY
ME MORY
ME MORY
Start Copy
[Cancel ]
:Cancel
Select the setting you want to copy.
• All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected
MCACC preset memory.
• LEVEL & DISTANCE – Copies only the channel level
and speaker distance settings of the selected
MCACC preset memory.
4 Press RETURN to go back to the Data Check menu,
repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.
DVD /L D
5. D at a M anag ement
DV D/ L D
- 5 5 . 0dB
5 c . MCACC Me mo r y Co py
Copy
All Data
From
[ M1. MEMORY 1 ]
To
[ M2. MEMORY 2 ]
:Re tu rn
2
- 5 5 . 0 dB
DV D / L D
5 a 5 . E Q D a t a C h e ck
MCACC
M1
63Hz : +0.5
Ch
[SBL] 125Hz : -5.5
dB
250Hz : +3.0
500Hz : 0.0
1kHz : +12.0
2kHz : +5.5
4kHz : -3.0
8kHz : 0.0
16kHz : +7.0
:Return
TRIM : -2.5
- 5 5 . 0dB
MCACC Da ta Ch e ck
Me mo r y Re n a me
MCACC Me mo r y Co py
MCACC Me mo r y Cl e a r
O u tp u t P C
1
2
3
4
5
6
]
]
]
]
]
3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the
settings ‘From’ then specify where you want to copy
them (‘To’).
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re
currently using (this can’t be undone).
4 Select ‘Copy’ to confirm and copy the settings.
Completed shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC
preset has been copied, then you automatically return to
the Data Management setup menu.
Clearing MCACC presets
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets
stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration
settings of that preset.
1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
:Finish
DV D/ L D
5 . Da ta Ma n ag e me n t
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then
select an appropriate preset name.
Use / to select the preset, then / to select a
preset name.
3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary,
then press RETURN when you’re finished.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 5 5 . 0dB
MCACC Da ta Ch e ck
Me mo r y Re n a me
MCACC Me mo r y Co py
MCACC Me mo r y Cl e a r
O u tp u t P C
DV D/ L D
- 5 5 . 0dB
5 d . MCACC Me mo r y Cl e a r
Cl e a r
M1 . ME MORY 1
S ta r t cl e a r
:Re tu rn
[Ca n c e l ]
:Ca n c e l
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re
currently using (this can’t be undone).
3 Select ‘Clear’ to confirm and clear the preset.
Completed shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC
preset has been cleared, then you automatically return to
the Data Management setup menu.
Note
1 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39.
49
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 50 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
The System Setup menu
08
Speaker Setting
Manual speaker setup
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to
optimize the surround sound performance. You only need
to make these settings once (unless you change the
placement of your current speaker system or add new
speakers).
These settings are designed to customize your system,
but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC &
Full Band Phase Control) on page 8, it isn’t necessary to
make all of these settings.
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration
(size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is
a good idea to make sure that the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC &
Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 are correct.1 Note that
this setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be
set independently.
1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
DV D/ L D
6 . Ma nu a l S P S e tu p
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Caution
- 5 5 . 0dB
S p e a k e r S e tti n g
Ch a n n e l L ev e l
S p e a k e r Di s ta n c e
X -Cu r v e
T HX Au d i o S e tti n g
DV D/ L D
6 a . S p e a k e r S e tti n g
F ro n t
S MAL L
Ce n te r [ S MAL L ]
S u rr
[ S MAL L ]
SB
[ SMALL x2 ]
SW
[
YES
]
X . OV E R [
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at
high volume.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ then press ENTER.
DV D/LD
- 55.0dB
Sy stem S etup ME NU
1. Auto MCACC
2. S ur r Back S ystem
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND P HAS E CTRL
5. Data Manag ement
6. Manual S P S etup
7. Input S etup
8. Other S etup
:E xit
DV D/LD
6. Manual S P S etup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 55 . 0dB
S peaker S etting
Channel Level
S peaker Distance
X -Cur ve
THX Audio S etting
:Retu rn
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to
adjust these settings in order:
• Speaker Setting – Specify the size and number of
speakers you’ve connected (see below).
• Channel Level – Adjust the overall balance of your
speaker system (page 51).
• Speaker Distance – Specify the distance of your
speakers from the listening position (page 51).
• X-Curve – Adjust the tonal balance of your speaker
system for movie soundtracks (page 52).
• THX Audio Setting – Specify whether you are using
a THX speaker setup (page 52).
3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.
- 5 5 . 0dB
8 0 Hz ]
(T HX :AL L S MAL L )
:Re tu rn
:Re tu rn
2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set
then select a speaker size.
Use / to select the size (and number) of each of the
following speakers:2
• Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you
didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send
the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.
• Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to
the front speakers).
• Surround – Select LARGE if your surround speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect
surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the
surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a
subwoofer).
• Surr Back – Select the number of surround back
speakers you have (one, two or none).3 Select LARGE
if your surround back speakers reproduce bass
frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send bass
frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you
didn’t connect surround back speakers choose NO.
Note
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.
2 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center and surround speakers can’t be set to LARGE
if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.
3 • If you selected Speaker B or Front Bi-Amp (in Surround back speaker setting on page 42) you can’t adjust the surround back settings.
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal.
50
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 51 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
The System Setup menu
08
• Subwoofer – LFE signals and bass frequencies of
channels set to SMALL are output from the
subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose the PLUS
setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass
sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the
bass frequencies that would normally come out the
front and center speakers are also routed to the
subwoofer).1 If you did not connect a subwoofer
choose NO (the bass frequencies are output from
other speakers).
• AUTO – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves
from speaker to speaker automatically.
3 Confirm your selected setup option.
The test tones will start after you press ENTER.
DV D/ L D
6 b . Ch a n n e l L ev e l
- 2 0 . 0dB
Please Wait . . . 20
Loud test tones will
be output.
:Re tu rn
3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.2
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
4 Adjust the level of each channel using the /
buttons.
If you selected MANUAL, use / to switch speakers.
The AUTO setup will output test tones in the order shown
on-screen:
Channel Level
DV D/ L D
0 . 0dB
6 b . Ch a n n e l L ev e l
MCACC
: M1 . ME MORY 1
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the
overall balance of your speaker system, an important
factor when setting up a home theater system.
L
C
R
0.0dB SR [
[ 0 . 0 d B] S BR [
[ 0 . 0 d B] S BL [
SL [
SW [
0 . 0 d B]
0 . 0 d B]
0 . 0 d B]
0 . 0 d B]
0 . 0 d B]
:F i n i s h
Important
• When Channel Level is selected while MCACC is set
to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC memory
appears. Select a memory to adjust manually.
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is
emitted.3
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
DV D/LD
- 55.0dB
6b. Channel Level
S elect MCACC memor y.
Tip
MCACC OFF
• The channel level can be changed at any time. Press
RECEIVER then press CH LEVEL on the remote
control, and then use / to adjust the level.
M1.ME MORY 1
E NTE R:Next
:Cancel
1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
DVD /L D
6. M anu al S P S etup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 55.0dB
Sp eaker S etting
C h annel Level
Sp eaker Distance
X- Cur ve
T H X Audio S etting
:Retur n
2
DV D/LD
- 55.0dB
6b. Channel Level
MCACC
: M1.MEMORY 1
Test Tone
AU TO
Speaker Distance
For good sound depth and separation from your system,
you need to specify the distance of your speakers from
the listening position. The receiver can then add the
proper delay needed for effective surround sound.
CAUTION
E NTE R:Next
:Retur n
Select a setup option.
• MANUAL – Move the test tone manually from
speaker to speaker and adjust individual channel
levels.
Note
1 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not,
however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due
low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with
it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems,
the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers.
2 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing
back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
• If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.
3 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB
SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack.
51
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 52 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
The System Setup menu
08
Important
• When Speaker Distance is selected while MCACC is
set to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC
memory appears. Select a memory to adjust
manually.
DV D/LD
- 55.0dB
6c. S peaker Distance
S elect MCACC memor y.
2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.
Use / to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed
as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at
2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope
increases (to a maximum of -3.0dB/oct). Use the
following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your
room size:
≤36
≤48
≤60
≤72
≤300
≤1000
X-Curve (dB/oct) –0.5
–1
–1.5
–2
–2.5
–3
Room size (m2)
MCACC OFF
M1.ME MORY 1
E NTE R:Next
:Cancel
1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
DVD/LD
6. Manual S P S etup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 55.0dB
S peaker S etting
Channel Level
S peaker Distance
X -Cur ve
THX Audio S etting
DV D/LD
- 55 . 0dB
6c. S peaker Distance
MCACC
: M1.ME MORY 1
L
C
R
0.50 m
[1.50 m ]
[1.00 m ]
:Fini s h
:Retur n
2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using the /
buttons.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.01
meters.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround
back speakers are the same distance from the
listening position.
• If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and
the X-Curve has no effect.
3
Select ‘Return’ then press ENTER to finish.
THX Audio Setting
For the most effective results when using the THX Select2
Cinema and THX MusicMode listening modes (see Using
the Home THX modes on page 29) with the Advanced
Speaker Array (ASA) system (see About THX on page 90),
it is required that you make the setting. See Placing the
speakers on page 20 for more on THX speaker
placement.2
1 Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP
Setup menu.
DV D/ L D
6 . Ma nu a l S P S e tu p
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 5 5 . 0dB
S p e a k e r S e tti n g
Ch a n n e l L ev e l
S p e a k e r Di s ta n c e
X -Cu r v e
T HX Au d i o S e tti n g
:Re tu rn
2 Specify the distance of your surround back speakers
from each other.
X-Curve
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright
when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting
acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater
listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie
soundtracks.1
DV D/ L D
- 5 5 . 0dB
6 e . T HX Au d i o S e tti n g
S B S P Po s i ti o n
0 -0 . 3 m
S BL -S BR
:F i n i s h
Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
DVD/LD
6. Manual S P S etup
DV D/LD
6d. X -Cur ve
X -Cur ve
- 55 . 0dB
-2.0dB/oc t
:Retur n
8k
4k
16k
2k
1k
500
63
S peaker S etting
Channel Level
S peaker Distance
X -Cur ve
THX Audio S etting
250
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 55.0dB
125
1
• 0 – 0.3m – Surround speakers within 30 cm apart
(best for THX surround sound).
• > 0.3 – 1.2m – Surround speakers between 30 cm
and 1.2 m apart.
• 1.2m < – Surround speakers more than 1.2 m apart.
:Fini s h
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Note
1 Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX modes (see Using the Home THX modes on page 29).
2 If you don’t have surround back speakers, or just have one, you won’t be able to select this setting (Cannot select shows in the display).
52
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 53 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Other connections
09
Chapter 9:
Other connections
Caution
• Make sure the power is switched off before making or
changing the connections.
Connecting an iPod
1 Set this receiver to the standby mode, and then use
the Control Dock for iPod supplied with an iPod control
cable2 to connect your iPod to the iPod terminal on the
rear panel of this receiver.
Push the connector in until you hear it click home. To
disconnect, squeeze the connector (as shown) to release
the catch, then pull out.
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow
you to control playback of audio content from your iPod
using the controls of this receiver.1
2 Switch the receiver on and press the iPod input
source button to switch the receiver to the iPod.
The front panel display shows Loading while the receiver
verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.
Connecting your iPod to the receiver
3 Use the TOP MENU button to display iPod Top
menu.
When the display shows Top Menu you’re ready to play
music from the iPod.3
PRE OUT
AUDIO
PHONO
ANTENNA
R
L FRONT
• If after pressing iPod the display shows No
Connection, try switching off the receiver and
reconnecting the iPod to the receiver.
AM LOOP
IN
ZONE2
CE
R
L
CENTER
SUB W.
CD
IN
SURROUND
D
SURROUND
BACK
OUT
AT
iPod playback
(Single)
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
R
L
IN
R
L
R
O/
1
L
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SURROUND
R/
R1
A
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
R
SURROUND
iPod
R
R/
R2
IN
L
L
R
SU
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage
of the OSD of your TV connected to this receiver.4 You can
also control all operations for music in the front panel
display of this receiver.
SURROUND BACK
Finding what you want to play
RS-232C
1
R
2
12 V TRIGGER
L
MULTI CH IN
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
AUDIO
iPod
Music >
Extras >
Settings >
Shuffle Songs
Backlight
iPod control
cable
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can
browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist,
album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to
using your iPod directly.
MENU
iPod Top
Control Dock
for iPod
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres
Composers
Audiobooks
Shuffle Songs
E NT E R
–55dB
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Note
1 This system is compatible with an iPod equipped with a dock connector port, iPod mini, iPod nano and iPod Photo portable device (third generation and
above). However, compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod. This receiver does not support software versions prior to iPod updater
2004-10-20 (plesae use the latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 2004-10-20). For supported versions, consult your local Pioneer dealer.
2 • This product is the Pioneer Control Dock for iPod (IDK-90C) for use with an iPod equipped with a dock connector port (third generation and above),
iPod mini, iPod nano or iPod Photo.
• For detailed instructions on using the iPod, please refer to the manual supplied with the iPod.
• The connected iPod should be updated with the latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 2004-10-20.
3 • The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver (Pioneer shows in the iPod display). Features such as the equalizer cannot
be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.
• You can’t use the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only) function simultaneously with the MULTI-ZONE feature (page 58).
4 • Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.
• This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod.
53
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 54 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Other connections
09
1 Use the / buttons to select a category then
press ENTER to browse that category.
• To return to the previous level, press RETURN.
2 Use the / buttons to browse the selected
category (e.g., albums).
• Use / to move to previous/next levels.
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you
want to play, then press  to start playback.1
Navigation through audio categories on your iPod looks
like this:
Playlists  Songs
Artists  Albums  Songs
Albums  Songs
Songs
Podcasts
Genres  Artists  Albums  Songs
Composers  Albums  Songs
Audiobooks
Shuffle Songs
Tip
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category
by selecting the All item at the top of each category
list. For example, you can play all the songs by a
particular artist.
Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic playback controls for
your iPod:
Button
What it does

Press to start playback.
If you start playback when something other than a
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that
category will play.

Press to stop playback.

Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.
/
Press and hold during playback to start scanning.
/
Press to skip to previous/next song.
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One,
Repeat All and Repeat Off.
Button
What it does
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle Songs,
Shuffle Albums and Shuffle Off.
DISP
Press repeatedly to change the song playback
information displayed.
/
During playback, press to skip to previous/next
playlist; when browsing, press to move to previous/
next levels.
/
During Audiobook playback, press to switch the
playback speed: Faster  Normal  Slower
TOP
MENU
Press to return to the iPod Top menu screen.
RETURN
Press to return to the previous level.
Watching photos and video content
To view photos or video on your iPod, since video control
is not possible using this receiver, you must use the main
controls of your iPod instead.2
1 Press PHOTO to switch to the iPod controls for
photo and video playback.
The receiver controls will be unavailable while you are
watching iPod videos or browsing photos.
2 Press PHOTO again to switch back to the receiver
controls when you’re done.
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped
component, you can connect it to this receiver using a
commercially available HDMI cable.3
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the
connected component is compatible with, including
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for
limitations), Video CD/Super VCD, CD and MP3. See
About the video converter on page 13 for more on HDMI
compatibility.
Note
1 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.
2 Your iPod nano currently restricts viewing of photo images stored.
3 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection
(HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support
audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, a HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some components
that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.
• This receiver has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Version 1.3a. Depending on the component you
have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. Also, when using a component with HDMI version 1.0, it is not possible
to output copy-controlled DVD-Audio CPPM sources from the HDMI connection.
• This receiver supports the DeepColor feature of HDMI. However, when analog signals are input, this receiver cannot output signals in DeepColor.
• This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure
that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.
54
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 55 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Other connections
09
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options
on page 70 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI
audio output from your TV or plasma display (no
sound will be heard from this receiver).
HDMI/DVI-equipped component
HDMI OUT
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
AM LOOP
IR
ZONE2
IN
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
MAIN
R
L
CD
IN
HDMI
OPTICAL
IN 1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
IN
OUT
2
LAN (10/100)
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
ASSIGNABLE
1
OUT
BD
IN
2
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN 2
IN 1
Y
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
OUT
Y
1
PB
PB
R
PR
PR
IN 2
IN 3
R
SUB W.
4
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s
digital out jacks.
IN
(DVD/
LD)
IN 3
IN 4
(CD-R)
Y
IN 2 (CD)
C
OUT
2
IN 4
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or
plasma display, try adjusting the resolution settings
on your component or display. Note that some
components (such as video game units) have
resolutions that may not be converted. In this case,
use an analog video connection.
AUDIO
PHONO
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
Y
IN
PB
OUT
About HDMI
R
(BD)
COAXIAL
OUT
PB
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
ASSIGNABLE
1
4
DIGITAL
PR
SURROUND BA
IN
1
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
ASSIGNABLE
1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
12 V TRIGGE
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
VSX-LX70
HDMI IN
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
or plasma display
1 Use an HDMI cable to connect one of the HDMI IN
interconnects on this receiver to an HDMI output on
your HDMI component.
HDMI indicator lights on the front panel when an HDMIequipped component is connected.
2 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT
interconnect on this receiver to an HDMI interconnect
on an HDMI-compatible monitor.
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be
facing right for correct alignment with the connector
on the player.
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports
both video and audio on a single digital connection for
use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV
devices. HDMI was developed to provide the
technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface
(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital
content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant
displays.
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include
uncompressed digital video, one connector (instead of
several cables and connectors), and communication
between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
HDMI, the
logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Connecting the multichannel analog
inputs
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may
have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending
on whether your player supports surround back
channels).1 Make sure that the player is set to output
multichannel analog audio.
3 Use the INPUT SELECT button to select the HDMI
input you’ve connected to (for example, HDMI 2).
You can also perform the same operation by using the
INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing
HDMI (SHIFT+TV CTRL) on the remote control
repeatedly.
Note
1 To listen to multichannel analog audio you’ll need to switch the input signal selector to MULTI CH IN (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs below
for more on this).
55
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 56 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
09
Other connections
1 Connect the front, surround, center and subwoofer
outputs on your DVD player to the corresponding
MULTI CH input jack on this receiver.
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the
connections.
2 If your DVD player also has outputs for surround
back channels, connect these to the corresponding
MULTI CH input jacks on this receiver.
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the
connections.
• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK L (Single) jack on this
receiver.
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as
above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs
for surround sound playback.1
SYSTEM OFF
RECEIVER
CD
DVD
INPUT
SELECT
SOURCE
CD-R
TV
HDMI
BD
TV CTRL
HOME MEDIA
1 Make sure you have set the playback source to the
proper output setting.
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to
output multichannel analog audio.
2 Use the INPUT SELECT button to select MULTI CH
IN.
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front
panel.
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be
too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer
can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup in
Other Setup. For details, see Multi Channel Input
Setup on page 68.
Speaker B setup
Caution
• Before making or changing the connections, switch off
the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in components should be the
last connection you make with your system.
• Be careful not to allow any contact between speaker
wires from different terminals.
• You can use speakers with a nominal impedance
between 6 Ω to 16 Ω (please see Switching the
speaker impedance on page 73 if you plan to use
speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).
After selecting Speaker B in Surround back speaker
setting on page 42, you can use the speakers connected
to the (surround back) B speaker terminals on the rear
panel to listen to stereo playback in another room. See
Switching the speaker system below for the listening
options with this setup.
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back
speaker terminals on the rear panel.
Connect them the same way you connected your
speakers in Installing your speaker system on page 19.
Make sure to review Placing the speakers on page 20
when placing the speakers in another room.
2 Select ‘Speaker B’ from the ‘Surr Back System’
menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 42 to do this.
Switching the speaker system
If you selected Speaker B in Surround back speaker
setting on page 42, three speaker system settings are
possible using the SPEAKERS button. If you selected
Normal (default) or Front Bi-Amp, the button will
simply switch your main speaker system on or off. The
options below are for the Speaker B setting only.2
• Use the SPEAKERS button on the front panel to
select a speaker system setting.
As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal
(default), the button will simply switch your main
speaker system (A) on or off.
Note
1 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, you can’t use Midnight/Loudness, Dialog Enhancement or the SIGNAL SELECT and ANALOG
ATT buttons, as well as any of the listening modes (including STEREO and the surround back channel processing).
• When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.
• You can’t listen to your speaker B (Second Zone) system during playback from the multichannel inputs.
2 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 50. However, if SPB is selected above, no sound is heard
from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 42 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.
• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.
56
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 57 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Other connections
AUDIO
SPEAKERS
PHONES
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
BAND
09
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SIGNAL
SELECT
SB ch
STEREO/
PROCESSING F.S.SURR
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
(ST)
SETUP
(ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
DIGITAL IN
RETURN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
2 Select the ‘Front Bi-Amp’ setting from the ‘Surr Back
System’ menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 42 to specify
how you’re using the surround back speaker terminals.
L AUDIO R
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:
• SPA – Sound is output from speaker system A and
the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.
• SPB – Sound is output from the two speakers
connected to speaker system B. Multichannel
sources will not be heard. The same signal is output
from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.
• SPAB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up
to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two
speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer.
The sound from speaker system B will be the same as
the sound from speaker system A (multichannel
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).
• SP (off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The
same sound is output from the pre-out terminals
(including from your subwoofer, if connected) as
when selecting speaker system A (above).
Bi-amping your front speakers
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver
and low frequency driver of your speakers to different
amplifiers (in this case, to both front and surround back
terminals) for better crossover performance. Your
speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate
terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement
will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.
Caution
• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals
have two metal plates that connect the High to the
Low terminals. These must be removed when you are
bi-amping the speakers or you could severely
damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for
more information.
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,
make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing
so may damage your speakers.
Bi-wiring your speakers
The reasons for bi-wiring are basically the same as biamping, but additionally, interference effects within the
wire could be reduced, producing better sound. Again, to
do this your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they
must have separate terminals for the high and low
frequencies). When bi-wiring, make sure you’ve selected
Normal (default) or Speaker B in Surround back speaker
setting on page 42.
• To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to
the speaker terminal on the receiver.
1 Connect your speakers as shown below.
This illustration below shows the connections for biamping your front left speaker. Hook up your front right
speaker in the same way.
SPEAKERS
A
R FRONT
L
CENTER
R SURROUND L
SURROUND BACK /
R
L(Single)
B
Caution
• Make sure you use a parallel (not series, which are
fairly uncommon) connection when bi-wiring your
speakers.
Front left
speaker
SELECTABLE
High
• Don’t connect different speakers from the same
terminal in this way.
Low
Since both front and surround back speaker terminals
output the same audio, it doesn’t matter which set (front
or surround back) is powering which part (High or Low)
of the speaker.
• Make sure that the + / – connections are properly
inserted.
57
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 58 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Other connections
09
Connecting additional amplifiers
MULTI-ZONE listening
This receiver has more than enough power for any home
use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every
channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the
connections shown below to add amplifiers to power
your speakers.
This receiver can power up to three independent systems
in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTIZONE connections. An example MULTI-ZONE setup is
shown below, but the number of MULTI-ZONE
connections (and the way you choose to connect them)
depends on how you want to set up your system.
• Before making or changing the connections, switch
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
AC outlet.
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
IN
ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN
HDMI
OPTICAL
INPUT
PRE OUT
R
IN 2
(BD)
Front channel
amplifier
L FRONT
IN 1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
R
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
2
LAN (10/100)
ANALOG
L
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
ASSIGNABLE
1
OUT
BD
IN
2
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
Y
Y
TV/SAT
IN
IN 1
IN
R
(DVD/
LD)
R
VIDEO /
CENTER
SUB W.
ANALOG
INPUT
Sub zone (ZONE 3)
SURROUND
Sub zone (ZONE 2)
Center channel
amplifier (mono)
SURROUND
BACK
Main zone
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
L
HDMI
IN
CENTER
A
R
IN
ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
ASSIGNABLE
1
IN
OUT
BD
IN
2
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN 2
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
IN 1
OUT
Y
Y
IN
R
(DVD/
LD)
IN 4
(CD-R)
IN 3
PB
PR
PR
IN 4
IN 2
IN 3
PB
L
R
L
F
SUB W.
4
1
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
Y
CENTER
OUT
2
IN 2 (CD)
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
Y
IN
PB
OUT
R
(BD)
L
COAXIAL
OUT
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG
L
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
1
4
DIGITAL
R
PB
PR
SURROUND BACK
IN
2
1
ASSIGNABLE
INPUT
iPod
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
FRONT
CONTROL
AUDIO
PHONO
AM LOOP
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
ZONE2
IN
(TV/SAT)
Powered
subwoofer
SPEAKERS
FRONT
IN 1
IN 1
L
ZONE2
OUT
2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
INPUT
L
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
MAIN
IN
ANALOG
(Single)
R
AUDIO
PHONO
AM LOOP
IR
MAIN
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
ASSIGNABLE
1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
12 V TRIGGER
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECT
SYSTEM
OFF
SOURCE
CD
DVD
TV
VIDEO
SAT
DVR2
VIDEO
DVR1
CD-R
XM RADIO
i Pod
Surround channel
amplifier
L
TUNER
SLEEP
2
1
TV CONT
ROOM2/3
RECEIVER
VIDEO
SEL
SR+
DIMMER
ANALOG
ATT
D.ACCESS
+10
AV PARAMETER
TOP
MENU
DTV
MENU
SETUP
CLASS
ENTER DISC
TUNE
CH
LEVEL
MENU
ST
ENTER
ST
GUIDE CATEGORY
T.EDIT
TUNE
RETURN
TV CONTROL
TV VOL
BAND
INPUT
SELECT
TV CH
VOL
REC
DTV
MPX
INFO
MUTE
REC
AUDIO
STOP
MEMORY
SUBTITLE
DISP
HDD
STATUS
DVD
CH
SIGNAL
SEL
MULTI
CH
SBch
OPE
STEREO
THX
STANDARD
SHIFT
ADV.
ISOPHASE
SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
RECEIVER
IR receiver
INPUT
SELECT
DVR1
DVR2
DVD
OFF
SOURCE
SYSTEM
2
1
RECEIVER
ANALOG
ATT
ADV.
SURR
S.DIRECT
STEREO
CH
DVD
MCACC
RECEIVER
STANDARD
MEMORY
SBch
MUTE
CH
HDD
VOL
STOP
ISOPHASE
SEL
THX
INFO
REC
RETURN
DTV
BAND
SIGNAL
T.EDIT
OPE
SHIFT
TV CH
LEVEL
MENU
SUBTITLE
REC
ST
MULTI
CH
ENTER
STATUS
CLASS DISC
AUDIO
DISP
INPUT
SELECT
MPX
TV CONTROL
TUNE
ENTER
ROOM2/3
TV CONT
DIMMER
TUNE
TV VOL
VIDEO
SEL
TUNER
XM RADIO
VIDEO
VIDEO
SR+
i Pod
SLEEP
CD-R
SAT
TV
ST
CATEGORY
GUIDE
+10
MENU
SETUP
DTV
D.ACCESS
R
AV PARAMETER
MENU
TOP
2
L
CD
INPUT
RS-232C
GGER
RECEIVER
ANALOG
D BACK
MULTI CH IN
Surround back
channel amplifier
AX)
VSX-LX70
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround
back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In
this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))
terminal only.
• The sound from the surround back terminals will
depend on how you have configured the Surround
back speaker setting on page 42.
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the
speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.
• If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front
speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 50) to
LARGE.
Different sources can be playing in three zones at the
same time or, depending on your needs, the same source
can also be used (however, if iPod, HOME MEDIA
GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only) is
selected in the main zone, it cannot also be selected in
the sub zone). The main and sub zones have independent
power (the main zone power can be off while one (or
both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub zones can be
controlled by the remote or front panel controls.
However, you may need to specify the volume settings in
ZONE Audio Setup on page 68.
Making MULTI-ZONE connections
It is possible to make these connections if you have a
separate TV and speakers for your primary (ZONE 2) sub
zone, and a separate amplifier1 (and speakers) for your
secondary (ZONE 3) sub zone. You will also need a
separate amplifier if you are not using the Surround Back
System setup (see below) for your primary sub zone.
There are two primary sub zone setups possible with this
system. Choose whichever works best for you.
Note
1 You can’t use sound controls (such as the tone controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub zone. You can,
however, use the features available with your sub zone amplifier.
58
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 59 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Other connections
09
MULTI-ZONE listening options
The following table shows what you can listen to in each
sub zone:
Sub Zone
Input sources available
ZONE2
iPod, the built-in tuner and other analog audio
sources.a With video sources, only composite
video is possible.
ZONE3
Only digital audio sources (the input source
must already be assigned using the The Input
Setup menu on page 66) are available.
• Connect a TV monitor to the MULTI-ZONE &
SOURCE MONITOR OUT jacks on the rear of this
receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the
surround back speaker terminals as shown below.
Sub zone
Main zone
AC IN
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
ZONE2
L
CONTROL
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
IN
SURROUND
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
ASSIGNABLE
1
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
Y
Y
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
PB
PB
PR
PR
R
IN 2
IN 3
L
IN 4
A
IN
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
Y
IN
PB
PB
OUT
PR
PR
IN
Y
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
FRONT
R
L
CENTER
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK /
B
L(Single)
OUT
2
IN 2 (CD)
AC OUTLET
SWITCHED 100 W 0.4 A MAX
L
L
R
SUB W.
4
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
R
IN
(DVD/
LD)
1
(Single)
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
OUT
IN 1
IN 3
IN 4
(CD-R)
SURROUND
BACK
OUT
BD
IN
2
IN 2
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
a.With the MULTI CH IN input, sound is output only from the front L/R
channels.
CENTER
SUB W.
CD
OUT
2
MONITOR
OUT
L FRONT
IN
ZONE2
R
IN
ZONE2
HDMI
IN 1
R
AM LOOP
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
MAIN
LAN (10/100)
PRE OUT
AUDIO
PHONO
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
1
OUT2
OPTICAL
iPod
R
(BD)
L
COAXIAL
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
RS-232C
1
ASSIGNABLE
1
SURROUND BACK
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
4
ASSIGNABLE
1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
2
12 V TRIGGER
MULTI CH IN
SELECTABLE
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)
1 Connect a separate amplifier to the MULTI-ZONE &
SOURCE OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the MULTIZONE & SOURCE MONITOR OUT jacks, both on the
rear of this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub
zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
UND
L
IR
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
R
SURROUND BACK /
B
L(Single)
OUT
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
ASSIGNABLE
1
2
SELECTABLE
& SOURCE
IN
1
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
AM LOOP
IR
ZONE2
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
MAIN
IN
R
L
CD
IN
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
IN 1
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
1
2
• Connect a separate amplifier to the OUT1 ZONE3
digital output on the rear of this receiver.
The amplifier must have an optical digital input to make
this connection. This will allow you to hear the digital
output of a component in a second sub zone.1
DVD/LD
IN
OUT
BD
IN
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
OUT
Sub zone
Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 3)
IN
OUT
2
Main zone
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
ASSIGNABLE
1
IN 1
OUT
Y
Y
IN 3
PB
PR
PR
IN 4
IN 2
IN 3
Y
Y
PB
MAIN
IN
IN
R
R
2
LAN (10/100)
SUB W.
4
1
ASSIGNABLE
IN 2 (CD)
HDMI
OUT
2
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
OUT2
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
(DVD/
LD)
IN 4
(CD-R)
IN
1
OUT
BD
IN
2
IN 2
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
OUT
2
ZONE2
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
IN
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
IN
HDMI
IN 1
AU
PHONO
AM LOOP
IR
MAIN
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
ZONE2
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
R
(BD)
COAXIAL
OUT
PB
1
4
DIGITAL
OUT
PB
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
ASSIGNABLE
PR
SUR
IN
1
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
ASSIGNABLE
1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
1
(DC OU
TOTAL
Main zone
Sub zone (ZONE 3)
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
ZONE2
I
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
L
R
C
IN
OPTICAL
You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back speaker setting
on page 42 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the
sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling
the main zone (for example, changing the input source or
starting playback).
IN 1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
Surround Back System MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
I
OUT
2
HDMI
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
ASSIGNABLE
1
O
BD
IN
2
IN 2
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
P
AM LOOP
IR
MAIN
LAN (10/100)
IN 1
OUT
Y
Y
C
TA
M
I
(DVD/
LD)
IN 4
(CD-R)
IN 3
PB
PR
PR
IN 4
IN 2
IN 3
Y
Y
PB
S
4
1
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
OUT
2
IN 2 (CD)
S
R
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
(BD)
COAXIAL
OUT
DIGITAL IN
PB
1
4
DIGITAL
OUT
PB
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
ASSIGNABLE
PR
IN
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
ASSIGNABLE
1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
Note
1 Only one sub zone is possible if you connect the OUT1 ZONE3 digital output to your second sub zone.
59
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 60 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
09
Other connections
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust
the sub zone volume and select sources.1 See MULTIZONE remote controls below.
AUDIO
SPEAKERS
PHONES
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
BAND
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SIGNAL
SELECT
SB ch
STEREO/
PROCESSING F.S.SURR
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
(ST)
SETUP
(ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
DIGITAL IN
RETURN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
• If you select TUNER, you can use the TUNER controls
to select a preset station (see Saving station presets
on page 36 if you’re unsure how to do this).4
• You can’t use the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY
(VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only) functions
simultaneously using the MULTI-ZONE feature.
4 Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the
volume.
This is only possible if you selected the VARIABLE
volume control in ZONE Audio Setup on page 68.5
L AUDIO R
VSX-LX70
STANDBY/ON
PHASE
CONTROL
PHASE
CONTROL
ADVANCED
MCACC
MCACC
AUTO SURR/
POSITION STREAM DIRECT
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
HOME
THX
HDMI
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
INPUT
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME
5 When you’re finished, press CONTROL again to
return to the main zone controls.
You can also press the MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE ON/
OFF button on the front panel to switch off all output to
the sub zone(s).6
MULTI-ZONE remote controls
1 Press the MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE ON/OFF button
on the front panel.
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
• ZONE 2 ON – Selects your primary (ZONE 2) sub
zone
• ZONE 2&3 ON – Select both sub zones
• ZONE 3 ON – Selects your secondary (ZONE 3) sub
zone
• MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-ZONE
feature off
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE
control has been switched ON.
2 Press CONTROL to select the sub zone(s) you want.2
If you selected ZONE 2&3 ON above, you can toggle
between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3.
• When the receiver is on,3 make sure that any
operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and
your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this
is not showing, the front panel controls affect the
main zone only.
3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source
for the zone you have selected.
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected
to the CD-R inputs to the primary (ZONE 2) sub room.
The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE
remote controls:
Button
What it does
Selects the sub zone you want to control,
SHIFT+
RECEIVER shown in the display as RCV/Z2 (ZONE2) or
RCV/Z3 (ZONE3).

Switches on/off power in the currently
selected sub zone.
INPUT
SELECT
Use to select the input source in the currently
selected sub zone.
Input
source
buttons
Use to select the input source directly (this
may not work for some functions) in the currently selected sub zone.
VOL +/–
Use to set the listening volume in the currently
selected sub zone (ZONE2 only).
Connecting an IR receiver
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or
shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote
control in another zone, you can use an optional IR
receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your
system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of
this receiver.7
Note
1 When you use ZONE 2, you must set ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu to ZONE 2 (page 68).
2 Note that when recording, this also selects the RECOUT input source. See Making an audio or a video recording on page 72 for more on this.
3 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display.
4 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone.
Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.
5 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent.
6 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for awhile, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.
7 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.
60
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 61 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Other connections
09
1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE IR IN (MAIN ZONE) jack on the rear of this
receiver.
If you also plan to use a separate IR receiver in the sub
room, connect this to the ZONE2 jack.
Closet or shelving unit
Non-Pioneer
component
IR
• Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to
the 12 V trigger of another component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the
connection.
• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V/50 mA.
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch
on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on
or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on
page 66.
IN
Pioneer
component
CONTROL
IN
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
IN
1
FM UNBAL
IR
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
M
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT
MAIN
IN
1
OUT2
CONTROL
IN
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
MON
TOR
OUT
IN
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
IN 1
Y
IN 1
OUT
Y
Y
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
1
2
Y
PB
PR
IN 2
IN 3
Y
Y
SURROUND
BACK
OUT
BD
IN
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
(Single)
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN
OUT
PR
R
R
IN 4
L
L
R
L
SPEAKERS
FRONT
SUB W.
CENTER
IN
A
R
FRONT
L
OUT
2
IN 2 (CD)
CENTER
DVD/LD
IN
ASSIGNABLE
PB
L FRONT
SUB W.
IN
SURROUND
MONITOR
OUT
4
1
ASSIGNABLE
IN 2
MONITOR
OUT
(DVD/
LD)
IN 3
IN 4
(CD-R)
2
PRE OUT
L
CD
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
IN 2
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
ASSIGNABLE
1
CONTROL
R
IN
ZONE2
R
OUT
ZONE2
IN 1
AUDIO
PHONO
AM LOOP
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
2
HDMI
OPTICAL
ZONE2
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
IN
LAN (10/100)
2
IN 1
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
MAIN
IN
HDMI
Using this receiver with a Pioneer
plasma display
OUT
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
iPod
IN
R
(BD)
L
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
(DVD/
LD)
PB
1
OUT
PB
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
PR
SURROUND BACK
RS-232C
IN
1
ASSIGNABLE
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
4
ASSIGNABLE
1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
2
12 V TRIGGER
MULTI CH IN
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
IR receiver
If you have a Pioneer plasma display, you can use an
SR+ cable1 to connect it to this unit and take advantage
of various convenient features, such as automatic video
input switching of the plasma display when the input is
changed.2
CONTROL
2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE IR OUT jack on the rear of this
receiver to link it to the IR receiver.
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for
the type of cable necessary for the connection.
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR
receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor on page 81 to connect to the
CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.
OUT
Pioneer plasma
display
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
AM LOOP
ZO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
R
OUT
2
HDMI
IN 1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
You can connect components in your system (such as a
screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on
or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input
function. However, you must specify which input
functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup
menu on page 66. Note that this will only work with
components that have a standby mode.
ZONE2
OUT
IN
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
Switching components on and off using
the 12 volt trigger
A
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
MAIN
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
ASSIGNABLE
1
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
BD
IN
2
IN 2
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
IN 1
OUT
Y
Y
(DVD/
LD)
IN 3
IN 4
(CD-R)
1
PB
PB
PR
PR
IN 2
IN 3
Y
Y
IN
PB
PB
OUT
PR
PR
IN
4
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
OUT
2
IN 4
IN 2 (CD)
DVR/
VCR 1
(BD)
COAXIAL
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
1
4
DIGITAL
DVR/
VCR 2
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
ASSIGNABLE
1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AU
12V
TRIGGER
IN
R
L
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
SURROUND BACK
RS-232C
IN
1
R
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
2
12 V TRIGGER
MULTI CH IN
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
Note
1 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for
more information on obtaining an SR+ cable (you can also use a commercially available 3-ringed mini phone plug for the connection).
2 This receiver is compatible with all SR+ equipped Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward.
61
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 62 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
09
Other connections
Important
• You can’t use the SR+ features when HDMI Control
is set to ON. Make sure to set HDMI Control to OFF
when you use the SR+ features (page 65).
• If you connect to a Pioneer plasma display using an
SR+ cable, you will need to point the remote control
at the plasma display remote sensor to control the
receiver. In this case, you won’t be able to control the
receiver using the remote control if you switch the
plasma display off.
• Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need
to make a few settings in the receiver. See The Input
Setup menu on page 66 and SR+ Setup for Pioneer
plasma displays on page 68 for detailed instructions.
• Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the
CONTROL IN jack of this receiver with the CONTROL
OUT jack of your plasma display.
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer
plasma display
When connected using an SR+ cable, a number of
features become available to make using this receiver
with your Pioneer plasma display even easier. These
features include:
• On-screen displays when making receiver settings,
such as speaker setup, MCACC setup, and so on.
• On-screen volume display.
• On-screen display of listening mode.
• Automatic video input switching on the plasma
display.
• Automatic volume muting on the plasma display.
See also SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays on
page 68 for more on setting up the receiver.
Important
• The SR+ features do not work when any of the iPod,
HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSXLX60) function is selected.
VIDEO
INPUT 1
Pioneer plasma
display
VIDEO
INPUT 2
SYSTEM OFF
RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECT
SLEEP
DIMMER
SR+
GENRE
ANALOG
ATT
SOURCE
D.ACCESS
CLASS
CLEAR
+10
DVD player
Satellite receiver, etc
CD
CD-R
DVD
TV
DVR2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
TUNER
TV CTRL
BAND
ZONE2/3
SETUP
ST
RECEIVER
PROGRAM
PTY SEARCH GUIDE
DVD/LD
AUDIO IN
SAT
AUDIO IN
VSX-LX70
STANDBY/ON
PHASE
CONTROL
PHASE
CONTROL
ADVANCED
MCACC
MCACC
AUTO SURR/
POSITION STREAM DIRECT
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
HOME
THX
HDMI
STANDARD
SURROUND
INPUT
SELECTOR
ADVANCED
SURROUND
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
TUNE
HDMI
BD
DISC
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU 
ST
ENTER

RETURN
TUNE
1 Make sure that the plasma display and this receiver
are switched on and that they are connected with the
SR+ cable.
See Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display
above for more on connecting these components.
MASTER
VOLUME
• Make sure you have also selected the display input to
which you’ve connected the receiver in The Input
Setup menu on page 66.
This receiver
To make the most of the SR+ features, you should
connect your source components (DVD player, etc.) in a
slightly different way to that described in this chapter. For
each component, connect the video output directly to the
plasma display, and just connect the audio (analog and/
or digital) to this receiver.
62
En
2 To switch SR+ mode on/off, press RECEIVER, then
the SR+ button.
The front panel display shows SR+ ON or SR+ OFF.
• The automatic video input switching and the
automatic volume muting features are enabled
separately; see SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays
on page 68.
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 63 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Other connections
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC
output
When using the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
(see page 45) to calibrate the reverb characteristics of
your listening room, you can graphically check the
results on your computer connected to this receiver.
Also, when the Full Band Phase Control function is
activated, you can visually check the calibrated
characteristics of group delay of the speakers and the
corrected characteristics of group delay processed by the
exclusive correction filter by installing the corresponding
PC application on your computer.
Use a commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect
the RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C
jack on the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be
cross type, female-female).
The software to output the results is available from the
support area of the Pioneer website (www.pioneereur.com/files/support/MCACC/software.html).
Instructions for using the software are also available
here. If you have any questions about the sofrware,
please contact the Pioneer Service Center specified on
your warranty card.
Please make sure your system meets the following
requirements:
• Operating system must be Windows® Vista,
Windows® XP, Windows® 2000, Windows®
Millennium Edition, Windows® 98 Second Edition, or
Windows® NT 4.0 (Service pack 6).
• CPU must be at least Pentium 3 / 300 MHz or AMD
K6 / 300 MHz (or equivalent) with at least 128 MB of
memory, and your monitor must be able to display a
minimum resolution of 800x600.
• An RS-232C port connector is necessary for graphical
output. Refer to the operating instructions and/or the
PC manufacturer for more information on making
the proper port settings.
• System must have internet access.
• Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on
the rear panel of the receiver.
Make sure that the receiver and all connected
components are switched off and disconnected from the
power outlet when you do this.1
09
Use a commercially-available cable to connect the RS232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on
this receiver. See the documentation provided with the
Advanced MCACC application for more information.
RS-232C
Personal computer
Advanced MCACC output using your PC
Before continuing, make sure you have completed step 1
in Data Management on page 48. Note that transmission
data is erased when the receiver is turned off.
1 Select ‘Output PC’ and press ENTER.
When the receiver is ready for transmission, Start the
MCACC application on your PC shows on the OSD.
DV D/ L D
5 . Da ta Ma n ag e me n t
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 5 5 . 0dB
MCACC Da ta Ch e ck
Me mo r y Re n a me
MCACC Me mo r y Co py
MCACC Me mo r y Cl e a r
O u tp u t P C
:Re tu rn
DV D/ L D
5 e . O u tp u t P C
- 5 5 . 0dB
Star t the MCACC
application on your PC.
:Ca n c e l
2 Start the MCACC application on your computer.
Follow the instructions provided with the application. It
will take about ten seconds for the transmission to
complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on
your computer. Since the data will be cleared from the
receiver when you restart reverb measurement or turn off
the receiver, you might want to save the information on
your PC after measurement.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Data Management menu. Continue
with other settings in the Data Management menu if
necessary. Press RETURN again to exit the Data
Management menu.
Note
1 Make sure that you do this before continuing to the Reverb Measurement option in Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 46 (measurement
data is cleared if you switch off the power).
63
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 64 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
10
HDMI Control
Chapter 10:
HDMI Control
By connecting this receiver to an HDMI Controlcompatible Pioneer plasma display or the HDD/DVD
recorder with an HDMI cable, you can control this
receiver from the remote control of a connected plasma
display, as well as have the connected plasma display
automatically change inputs in response to operations
carried out on this unit.
HDMI Control-compatible
HDD/DVD Recorder
Refer to the operating manual for your plasma display for
more information about which operations can be carried
out by connecting via HDMI cable.
HDMI OUT
VSX-LX70
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
• You cannot use this function with components that
do not support HDMI Control.
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
AM LOOP
IN
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
R
L
CD
IN 1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
IN
OUT
2
OPTICAL
IN 1 (DVD/LD)
IN 2 (BD)
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
ASSIGNABLE
1
OUT
BD
IN
2
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN 2
IN 1
Y
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
OUT
Y
IN 1
TV/SAT
IN
IN 2
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
IN
R
(DVD/
LD)
IN 3
IN 4
(CD-R)
1
PB
PB
R
SUB W.
4
ASSIGNABLE
Making the HDMI Control connections
ZONE2
OUT
IN
LAN (10/100)
HDMI
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI
Control-compatible components other than those
made by Pioneer.
AUDIO
PHONO
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
MAIN
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
PR
PR
IN 2
IN 3
2
IN 4
Y
IN 2 (CD)
SURROUND
DVR/
VCR 1
Y
IN
PB
OUT
R
(BD)
You can use synchronized operation for a connected
plasma display and up to four other components
(including a maximum of two recorders or players).
COAXIAL
OUT
PB
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
1
4
DIGITAL
PR
SURROUND BA
IN
1
ASSIGNABLE
(VIDEO/GAME 1)
ASSIGNABLE
1 3
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
12 V TRIGGE
L
(DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)
AUDIO
Be sure to connect the plasma display’s audio cable to
the audio input of this unit.
Important
• When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch the power off and
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power
cords to the wall socket.
• After connecting this receiver to an AC outlet, a 15
second initialization process begins. You cannot
carry out any operations during initialization. The
HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during
initialization, and you can turn this receiver on once
it has stopped blinking.
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend
that you connect your HDMI component not to a
plasma display but rather directly to the HDMI
terminal on this receiver.
64
En
C
OUT
DIGITAL OUT
R
HDMI IN
HDMI Control-compatible
Pioneer plasma display
AUDIO
AV OUT
L
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 65 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
HDMI Control
10
Setting the HDMI options
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as
HDMI Control-compatible connected components in
order to make use of the HDMI Control function. For
more information see the operating instructions for each
component.
3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is
connected to this receiver, and see if video output
from connected components displays properly on
the screen on not.
4 Check whether the components connected to all
HDMI inputs are properly displayed.
Setting the HDMI Control mode
Synchronized amp mode
Choose whether to set this unit’s HDMI Control function
ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use the HDMI
Control function.
Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an
operation for the plasma display. For more information,
see the operating manual of your plasma display.
• When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer, put
this setting to OFF.
1 Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press
the SETUP button.
2
Select ‘Other Setup’ then press ENTER.
3 Select ‘HDMI Control Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
DVD /L D
8. Ot h er S etup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 55.0dB
M u lti Ch In S etup
Z ON E Audio S etup
SR + S etup
H D MI Control S etup
OSD Adjustment
DV D/LD
- 55.0dB
8d. HDMI Control S etup
HDMI Control
:Retur n
4
OFF
:Finish
Select the ‘HDMI Control’ setting you want.
• ON – Enables the HDMI Control function. When this
unit’s power is turned off and you have a supported
source begin playback while using the HDMI Control
function, the audio and video output from the HDMI
connection are output from the plasma display.1
• OFF – The HDMI Control is disabled. Synchronized
operations cannot be used. When this unit’s power is
turned off, audio and video of sources connected via
HDMI are not output.
Synchronized amp mode operations
By connecting a component to this receiver with an
HDMI cable you can use synchronized amp mode, which
allows you to synchronize the following operations:
• Displays on the plasma display when you mute or
adjust the volume of this receiver.
• The input of this receiver is automatically changed
when playback occurs on a connected component.
• Even if you change this receiver’s input to a device
that is not connected by HDMI, the synchronized
amp mode remains in effect.
• By pressing GENRE when listening to a source from
a HDD/DVD recorder, the most appropriate listening
mode is automatically selected (see Using the genre
synchronizing function on page 33 for more on this).
Canceling synchronized amp mode
If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected
via HDMI to a plasma display or while you are watching a
TV programme, the power for this unit is turned off.
About HDMI Control
5 When you’re finished, press SETUP.
You will finish to System Setup menu.
• Connect the plasma display directly to this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or
an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause
operational errors.
Before using synchronization
• Only connect components you intend to use as a
source to the HDMI input of this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or
an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause
operational errors.
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you
must:
1
Put all components into standby mode.
2 Turn the power ON for all components, with the
power for the plasma display being turned on last.
Note
1 • When HDMI Control is set to ON, the audio/video signals input at the HDMI IN terminals are output at the HDMI OUT terminal even when this receiver
is switched off.
• With HDMI Control set to ON, Input Setup and HDMI Input are automatically set to OFF.
65
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 66 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Other Settings
11
Chapter 11:
Other Settings
The Input Setup menu
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu
if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to
the default settings (see Input function default and
possible settings below). In this case, you need to tell the
receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal
so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the
components you’ve connected.
4 Select the input function that you want to set up.
The default names correspond with the names next to the
terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD/LD or VIDEO/
GAME 1) which, in turn, correspond with the names on
the remote control.
DVD/ L D
7 . I n p u t S e tu p
Input
Di g i ta l I n
HDMI I n p u t
Co mp o n e n t I n
S -V i d e o I n
(
[
[
[
[
- 5 5 . 0dB
(1 / 2 )
DV D
COAX -1 ]
I n p u t-1 ]
Co mp -3 ]
I n p u t-1 ]
DV D/ L D
- 5 5 . 0dB
7 . I n p u t S e tu p
(2 / 2 )
( Ba ck )
DV D/ L D
I n p u t Na me
Re n a me
1 2 V Tri gg e r1
[
OFF
]
1 2 V Tri gg e r2
[
OFF
]
P DP I n (S R+ )
[
OF F
]
Nex t )
:F i n i s h
ENTER : Next
:F i n i s h
SYSTEM OFF
RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECT
SOURCE
D.ACCESS
CLASS
CLEAR
+10
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU DISC
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
TUNE
BAND
ST
ST
ENTER
SETUP
RETURN
PROGRAM TUNE
PTY SEARCH GUIDE
CD
CD-R
DVD
TV
DVR2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
TV CONTROL
HDMI
BD
TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
TUNER
TV VOL
INPUT
SELECT
TV CH
VOL
RECEIVER
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the  RECEIVER button to switch on.
2 Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press
the SETUP button.
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the
/// buttons and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
3
Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.
DV D/LD
- 55.0dB
Sy stem S etup ME NU
1. Auto MCACC
2. S ur r Back S ystem
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND P HAS E CTRL
5. Data Manag ement
6. Manual S P S etup
7. Input S etup
8. Other S etup
DV D/LD
7. Input S etup
Input
Digital In
HDMI Input
Component In
S -V ideo In
(
:E xit
[
[
[
[
- 55 . 0dB
(1/2)
DVD
COAX -1 ]
Input-1 ]
Comp-3 ]
Input-1 ]
Next )
:Fini s h
5 Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your
component.
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical
output, you will need to change the DVD/LD input
function’s Digital In setting from COAX 1 (default) to the
optical input you’ve connected it to. The numbering
(OPT1 to 4) corresponds with the numbers beside the
inputs on the back of the receiver.
• If you change the setting to an input that has been
previously assigned to another function (for example,
TV) then the setting for that function will
automatically be switched off.
• If your component is connected via a component
video cable to an input terminal other than the
default, you must tell the receiver which input
terminal your component is connected to, or else you
may see the S-video or composite video signals
instead of the component video signals.1
6 When you’re finished, select ‘Next’ to continue to
the next screen.
The second screen of the Input setup has three optional
settings:
• Input Name – You can choose to rename the input
function for easier identification. Select Rename to
do so, or Default to return to the system default.
• 12V Trigger 1 / 2 – After connecting a component to
one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components
on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 61), select
MAIN, ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or OFF for the corresponding
trigger setting to switch it on automatically along
with the (main or sub) zone specified.
• PDP In (SR+) – To control certain functions on this
receiver from a plasma display, select the display
input to which you’ve connected the receiver.2
Note
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 71),
you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
2 You will have to make an SR+ cable connection from a CONTROL OUT jack on the display to the CONTROL IN jack on this receiver (opposite from the
setup in Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 61). Note that to control this receiver using the remote, you will have to point it at the
plasma display’s remote sensor after making this connection.
66
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 67 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Other Settings
11
7 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
The Other Setup menu
Input function default and possible settings
The terminals on the rear of the receiver generally
correspond to the name of one of the input source
functions. If you have connected components to this
receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults
below, see The Input Setup menu above to tell the receiver
how you’ve connected up. The dots () indicate possible
assignments.
The Other Setup menu is where you can make
customized settings to reflect how you are using the
receiver.
SYSTEM OFF
RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECT
SOURCE
D.ACCESS
Input Terminals
HDMI
Component S-Video
DVD/LD
COAX 1
BD
OPT 2

TV/SAT
OPT 1
a


DVR/VCR 1
OPT 3
a

(Fixed)
DVR/VCR 2

a

(Fixed)
VIDEO/
GAME 1

a
IN 3

VIDEO/
GAME 2
(Fixed)
a
HDMI 1
a
IN 1
IN 1
a
IN 2
IN 2
(Fixed)
(HDMI-1)
HDMI 2
(HDMI-2)
HDMI 3
(HDMI-3)
HDMI 4
(VSX-LX70)
(HDMI-4)
ST
ENTER
RETURN
CD-R
DVD
TV
DVR2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
TV CONTROL
HDMI
BD
TV CTRL
TV VOL
ZONE2/3
TUNER
INPUT
SELECT
TV CH
VOL
RECEIVER
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the  RECEIVER button to switch on.
2 Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press
the SETUP button.
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the
/// buttons and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
3
Select ‘Other Setup’ then press ENTER.
DV D/ L D
- 5 5 . 0dB
S y s te m S e tu p ME NU
1 . Au to MCACC
2 . S u rr Ba ck S y s te m
3 . Ma nu a l MCACC
4 . F UL L BAND P HAS E CT RL
5 . Da ta Ma n ag e me n t
6 . Ma nu a l S P S e tu p
7 . I n p u t S e tu p
8 . O th e r S e tu p
:E x i t
DV D/ L D
8 . O th e r S e tu p
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 5 5 . 0dB
Mu l ti Ch I n S e tu p
Z ONE Au d i o S e tu p
S R+ S e tu p
HDMI Co n tro l S e tu p
OS D Ad j u s tme n t
:Re tu rn
• Multi Ch In Setup – Specifies the optional settings
for a multi-channel input.
USB
(VSX-LX60)
CD-R/TAPE/
MD
ST
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to
adjust these settings in order:
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
(VSX-LX70)
CD
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
PROGRAM TUNE
PTY SEARCH GUIDE
CD
Digital
DISC
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
TUNE
BAND
SETUP
Input
source
CLASS
CLEAR
+10
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU COAX 2
OPT 4
TUNER
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
iPod
a. With HDMI Control set to ON, assignments cannot be made (see HDMI
Control on page 64).
• ZONE Audio Setup – Specify your volume setting for
a MULTI-ZONE setup (see ZONE Audio Setup below).
• SR+ Setup – Specify how you want to control your
Pioneer plasma display (see SR+ Setup for Pioneer
plasma displays below).
• HDMI Control Setup – Synchronizes this receiver
with your Pioneer component supporting HDMI
Control (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on
page 65).
• OSD Adjustment – Adjust the position of the onscreen display on your TV (see OSD Adjustment
below).
5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.
67
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 68 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Other Settings
11
Multi Channel Input Setup
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multichannel input. Also, when the multi-channel input is
selected as an input source, you can display the video
images of other input sources. In the Multi Channel Input
Setup, you can assign a video input to the multi-channel
input.
1 Select ‘Multi Ch In Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
DV D/LD
8. Other S etup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 55.0dB
1 Select ‘ZONE Audio Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
DV D/ L D
8 . O th e r S e tu p
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
• ZONE 2 – Sound is output from MULTI ZONE &
SOURCE ZONE2 OUT jack.
• RECSEL – Sound is output from the CD-R/TAPE OUT,
DVR/VCR1 OUT or DVR/VCR2 OUT jack. For details,
see Playing a different source when recording on
page 72.
3
• +10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level
increased by 10 dB.
DV D/LD
8a. Multi Ch In S etup
S W Input Gain
V ideo Input
• Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully
integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX
receiver) in the sub room and want to use that
receiver’s volume controls. (This setting is not
available if the surround back system setting is set to
ZONE 2.)
0dB
:Finish
3 Select the ‘Video Input’ setting you want.
When the multi-channel input is selected as an input
source, you can display the video images of other input
sources. The video input can be selected from the
following: DVD/LD, BD, TV/SAT, DVR/VCR1, DVR/
VCR2, VIDEO/GAME1, VIDEO/GAME2.
S W Input Gain
V ideo Input
Select the volume level setting.1
• Variable – Use this setting if you’ve connected a
power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is
simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be
using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.
- 55.0dB
[ DV D ]
DV D/LD
8a. Multi Ch In S etup
:F i n i s h
2 Select the ‘ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting’ you want.
You can select the ZONE 2 or RECSEL setting.
Multi Ch In S etup
ZONE Audio S etup
S R+ S etup
HDMI Control S etup
OS D Adjustment
Select the ‘SW Input Gain’ setting you want.
• 0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level
originally recorded on the source.
DV D/ L D
- 5 5 . 0dB
8 b . Z ONE Au d i o S e tu p
Z ONE 2 / RE CS E L S e tti n g
RE CS E L
Z ONE 2 Vo l u me L ev e l
[ Va ri a bl e ]
:Re tu rn
:Retur n
2
- 5 5 . 0dB
Mu l ti Ch I n S e tu p
Z O NE Au d i o S e tu p
S R+ S e tu p
HDMI Co n tro l S e tu p
O S D Ad j u s tme n t
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from this
receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is
quite low in the sub zone at first and then experiment to
find the correct level.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
- 55.0dB
[ 0dB ]
BD
:Finish
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
ZONE Audio Setup
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTIZONE listening on page 58) you may need to specify your
volume setting.
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays
Make the following settings if you have connected a
Pioneer plasma display to this receiver using an SR+
cable. Note that the number of function settings available
will depend on the plasma display you’ve connected.
See also Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display
on page 61 and Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer
plasma display on page 62.
1
Select ‘SR+ Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
DV D/ L D
8 . O th e r S e tu p
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 5 5 . 0dB
Mu l ti Ch I n S e tu p
Z O NE Au d i o S e tu p
S R+ S e tu p
HDMI Co n tro l S e tu p
O S D Ad j u s tme n t
DV D/ L D
8 c . S R+ S e tu p
OF F
Mo n i to r Ou t Co n n e c t
[ OFF ]
:Re tu rn
Note
1 If you selected ZONE 2 in the Surround back speaker setting on page 42, you won’t be able to change the volume level.
68
En
- 5 5 . 0dB
P DP Vo l u me Co n tro l
:F i n i s h
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 69 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Other Settings
2
11
Select the ‘PDP Volume Control’ setting you want.
• OFF – The receiver does not control the volume of the
plasma display.
• ON – When the receiver is switched to one of the
inputs that use the plasma display (DVD/LD, for
example), the volume on the plasma display is muted
so only sound from the receiver is heard.
3 Assign any input source connected to the plasma
display to the corresponding input number.
This matches the receiver’s input source with a
numbered video input on the plasma display. For
example, assign DVD/LD to input-2 if you have
connected the your DVD video output to video input 2 on
the plasma display.
• The Monitor Out Connect should be set to the input
that you’ve used to connect this receiver to your
plasma display.
DV D/LD
8c. S R+ S etup
- 55.0dB
P DP Volume Control
[ OFF
]
Monitor Out Connect
OFF
:Finish
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
OSD Adjustment
Use this feature to adjust your TV display if it seems
difficult to see all the instructions on the screen.
1 Select ‘OSD Adjustment’ from the Other Setup
menu.
DVD /L D
8. Ot h er Setup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
- 55.0dB
A
M u lt i Ch In S etup
Z ON E Audio S etup
SR + S etup
H D MI Control S etup
OSD Adjustment
A
X=0 , Y=0
[ Finish ]
:Cancel
:Retur n
A
A
2 Use /// to move the display field around
until you get one that you feel best suits your TV.
3 When you’re finished, press ENTER.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
69
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 70 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Using other functions
12
Chapter 12:
Using other functions
Setting
Setting the Audio options
There are a number of additional sound settings you can
make using the Audio Parameter menu. The defaults, if
not stated, are listed in bold.
Important
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Audio
Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current
source, settings and status of the receiver.
1
Press A PARAMETER (AUDIO PARAMETER).
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
Setting
What it does
MCACC
(MCACC
preset)
Selects your favorite MCACC preset M1. MEMORY 1
memory when multiple preset
to
memories are saved. When a
M6. MEMORY 6
MCACC preset memory has been
Default:
renamed, the name given is
M1. MEMORY 1
displayed.
Option(s)
MCACC OFFa
EQ
(Acoustic
Calibration
EQ)
Switches on/off the effects of EQ
Pro. only for the MCACC preset
memory selected. This setting is
available for each MCACC preset
memory.
S-WAVE
(Standing
Wave)
Switches on/off the effects of
Standing Wave Control only for the
MCACC preset memory selected.
This setting is available for each
MCACC preset memory.
DELAY
(Sound
Delay)
Some monitors have a slight delay
when showing video, so the
soundtrack will be slightly out of sync
with the picture. By adding a bit of
delay, you can adjust the sound to
match the presentation of the video.
0.0 to 6.0
(frames)
1 second = 25
frames (PAL)
Default: 0.0
Allows you to hear effective
surround sound of movies at low
volumes.
MID/LDN OFF
MIDNIGHT
ON
OFFb
ON
OFF
MIDNIGHT ON
LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble
from music sources at low volumes. LOUDNESS ON
70
En
Option(s)
BYPASS
ON
BASSc
Adjusts the amount of bass.
–6 to +6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
TREBLEc
Adjusts the amount of treble.
–6 to +6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
S.RTRV
(Sound
Retriever)
When audio data is removed during
the WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC
compression process, sound quality
often suffers from an uneven sound
image. The Sound Retriever feature
employs new DSP technology that
helps bring CD quality sound back
to compressed 2-channel audio by
restoring sound pressure and
smoothing jagged artifacts left over
after compression.
OFF
DNR
May improve the quality of sound in
(Digital Noise a noisy source (for example,
Reduction)
cassette or video tape with lots of
background noise) when switched
on.
OFF
DIALOG E
(Dialog
Enhancement)
Localizes dialog in the center
channel to make it stand out from
other background sounds in a TV or
movie soundtrack.
OFF
HIBITSMP
(High Bit /
High
Sampling)
Creates a wider dynamic range with
digital sources like CDs or DVDs.
OFF
2 Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
3 Use / to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.
What it does
TONE
Applies the treble and bass tone
(Tone Control) controls to a source, or bypasses
them completely.
ON
ON
ON
ON
DUAL
Specifies how dual mono encoded
(Dual Mono) Dolby Digital soundtracks should be
played. Dual mono is not widely
used, but is sometimes necessary
when two languages need to be sent
to separate channels.
CH1 –
Channel 1 is
heard only
CH2 –
Channel 2 is
heard only
CH1 CH2 –
Both channels
heard from front
speakers
DRC
(Dynamic
Range
Control)
Adjusts the level of dynamic range
for movie soundtracks optimized for
Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital
Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and
DTS-HD Master Audio (you may
need to use this feature when
listening to surround sound at low
volumes).
AUTOd
OFF
MAX
MID
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 71 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Using other functions
12
Setting
What it does
LFE ATT
(LFE
Attenuate)
Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio
sources include ultra-low bass
tones. Set the LFE attenuator as
necessary to prevent the ultra-low
bass tones from distorting the
sound from the speakers.
The LFE is not limited when set to
0 dB, which is the recommended
value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB,
–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is limited
by the respective degree. When OFF
is selected, no sound is output from
the LFE channel.
SACD
GAINe
Brings out detail in SACDs by
maximizing the dynamic range
(during digital processing).
HDMI
(HDMI
Audio)
Specifies the routing of the HDMI
audio signal out of this receiver
(amp) or through to a TV or plasma
display. When THROUGH is
selected, no sound is output from
this receiver.
A. DELAY
(Auto delay)
This feature automatically corrects
the audio-to-video delay between
components connected with an
HDMI cable. The audio delay time is
set depending on the operational
status of the display connected with
an HDMI cable. The video delay time
is automatically adjusted according
to the audio delay time.f
OFF
Provides a better blend of the front
speakers by spreading the center
channel between the front right and
left speakers, making it sound wider
(higher settings) or narrower (lower
settings).
0 to 7
Default: 3
C. WIDTHg
(Center
Width)
(Applicable
only when
using a center
speaker)
DIMENSIONg Adjusts the depth of the surround
sound balance from front to back,
making the sound more distant
(minus settings), or more forward
(positive settings).
PANORAMAg Extends the front stereo image to
include the surround speakers for a
‘wraparound’ effect.
C. IMAGEh
(Center
Image)
(Applicable
only when
using a center
speaker)
Adjusts the center image to create a
wider stereo effect with vocals.
Adjust the effect from 0 (all center
channel sent to front right and left
speakers) to 10 (center channel sent
to the center speaker only).
EFFECT
Sets the effect level for the currently
selected Advanced Surround mode
(each mode can be set separately).
Option(s)
0dB
–5dB/ –10dB/
–15dB/ –20dB/
OFF
0 to 6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
AMP
THROUGH
a.When MCACC OFF is selected, all MCACC preset memories become
deactivated.
b.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light even
when a MCACC preset memory is selected.
c.The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.
d.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select
MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.
e. You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but
if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0 dB.
f. This feature is only available when the connected display supports the
automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lip-sync’) for HDMI or
HDMI Control. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set
A. DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For more details
about the lip-sync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer
directly.
g.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/
Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
h.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode.
Setting the Video options
There are a number of additional picture settings you can
make using the Video Parameter menu. The defaults, if
not stated, are listed in bold.
Important
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Video
Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current
source, setting and status of the receiver.
ON
1
Press V PARAMETER (VIDEO PARAMETER).
2 Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
3 Use / to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.1
–3 to +3
Default: 0
OFF
ON
0 to 10
Default: 3
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
Setting
What it does
V. CONV
Converts video signals for output
(Digital Video from the MONITOR OUT jacks for
Conversion) all video types.
BRIGHT
(Brightness)
Adjusts the overall brightness.
Option(s)
ON
OFF
–10 to +10
Default: 0
CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast between light
and dark.
–10 to +10
Default: 0
HUE
Adjusts the red/green balance.
–10 to +10
Default: 0
CHROMA
Adjusts saturation from dull to
bright.
–10 to +10
Default: 0
10 to 90
Note
1 Brightness, Contrast, Hue, Chroma, Resolution and Aspect can be set for each input source.
71
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 72 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
12
Using other functions
Setting
What it does
RESa
(Resolution)
Specifies the output resolution of
the video signal (when analog video
input signals are output at the HDMI
OUT connector, select this
according to the resolution of your
monitor and the images you wish to
watch). When AUTO is selected, the
resolution is automatically selected
depending on the capability of the
display connected to this receiver.
ASP
(Aspect)
Specifies the aspect ratio when
analog video input signals are
output at the HDMI output. Make
your desired settings while checking
each setting on your display (if the
image doesn’t match your monitor
type, cropping or black bands
appear).
Option(s)
AUTO
For more information about video connections, see
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video
sources on page 16.
PURE
SYSTEM OFF
480p/576p
RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECT
SOURCE
720p
1080i
1080p
CD
THROUGH
(none)
NORMAL
ZOOM
a.When a resolution value is selected in this setting and the analog signals
input are converted and output as HDMI signals, images may not appear
depending on the video signals being input or the resolution of your
monitor. Also, depending on the source component or the monitor being
used, the output resolution may be different from this setting. Conversion
to 1080p is available only for the input signals of 480i/576i/480p/576p.
Making an audio or a video recording
CD-R
HDMI
DVD
TV
DVR2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
BD
TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
TUNER
RECEIVER
1 Select the source you want to record.
Use the input source buttons (or INPUT SELECT).
• If necessary, press SIGNAL SELECT to select the
input signal corresponding to the source component
(see Choosing the input signal on page 31 for more
on this).
2 Prepare the source you want to record.
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.
3 Prepare the recorder.
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording
device and set the recording levels.
You can make an audio or a video recording from the
built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).1
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if
you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set
the audio recording level automatically—check the
component's instruction manual if you’re unsure.
To use this feature, you must set ZONE2/RECSEL to
RECSEL in the ZONE Audio Setup. For details, see ZONE
Audio Setup on page 68.
4 Start recording, then start playback of the source
component.
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an
analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the
components you are recording to/from are hooked up in
the same way (see Connecting your equipment on
page 12 for more on connections).
Since the video converter is not available when making
recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use
the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder
as you used to connect your video source (the one you
want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must
connect your recorder using S-video if your source has
also been connected using S-video.
Tip
• If you have a digital recorder connected to the
DIGITAL OUT1 (ZONE3) digital output and ZONE 3 is
switched on (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on
page 60), you can also select a different input source
for this output while ZONE 3 shows in the display.
Playing a different source when recording
Using this receiver, it’s possible to listen to a different
analog source than the one you’re recording.
AUDIO
SPEAKERS
PHONES
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
BAND
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SIGNAL
SELECT
SB ch
STEREO/
PROCESSING F.S.SURR
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
(ST)
SETUP
ENTER
(TUNE)
(ST)
RETURN
DIGITAL IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
Note
1 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.
72
En
L AUDIO R
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 73 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Using other functions
1 During recording, press the REC SELECT CONTROL
button on the front panel until RECOUT shows in the
display.1
2 While RECOUT shows in the display, use the
INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source you want
to record.
The default, RECOUT SOURCE, records the source you’re
currently listening to (as in Press RETURN to confirm and
exit the menu. above).
• Note that the setting you make here is stored in
memory, even if you switch off the receiver, so if you
want to record a different input source later, you
must do so with REC SELECT, or by selecting
RECOUT SOURCE.
3 After RECOUT disappears from the display, select
the input source you want to listen to.
This will be heard from the main system without affecting
your recording.2
Reducing the level of an analog signal
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog
signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find
the that the OVER indicator is lights often, or you can
hear distortion in the sound.3
SLEEP
DIMMER
SR+
GENRE
D.ACCESS
ANALOG
ATT
CLASS
SC
12
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time
by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will
cycle through the sleep options again.4
Dimming the display
You can choose between four brightness levels for the
front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the
display automatically brightens for a few seconds.
SLEEP
DIMMER
SR+
GENRE
D.ACCESS
ANALOG
ATT
CLASS
• Press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness
of the front panel display.
Switching the speaker impedance
We recommend using speakers of 8 Ω with this system,
but it is possible to switch the impedance setting if you
plan to use speakers with a 6 Ω impedance rating.
1 With the receiver in standby, press  STANDBY/
ON while holding down the SETUP button.
2 Select SPEAKER using /, then select 8 Ω or 6 Ω
using /.
• SPEAKER 6 Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are
rated at 6 Ω.
• SPEAKER 8 Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are
rated at 8 Ω or more.
• Press ANALOG ATT to switch the input attenuator
on or off.
Using the sleep timer
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a
specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use
the remote control to set the sleep timer.
SLEEP
DIMMER
SR+
GENRE
D ACCESS
•
ANALOG
ATT
CLASS
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time.
30 min
60 min
Off
90 min
Note
1 If RECOUT does not appear in the display, you may have to switch ZONE 2 off by pressing MULTI ZONE & SOURCE ON/OFF and selecting either
ZONE 3 or off (the MULTI-ZONE indicator disappears). See Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 60 for more on this.
2 If RECOUT SOURCE is selected, changing the input source likewise changes the input source used for your recording.
3 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct modes.
4 You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.
73
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 74 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Using other functions
12
Default system settings
Checking your system settings
Use the status display screen to check your current
settings for features such as surround back channel
processing and your current MCACC preset.
AUDIO SUBTITLE
HDD
DISP
CH
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
DVD
CH
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
Setting
HDMI Audio
A
Surround Back System
Normal (default)
STANDARD ADV. SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
Input source
↓
Surround Back Processing
↓
MCACC preset
↓
ZONE 2 / REC SEL
↓
ZONE 3
↓
HDMI Control
2 When you’re finished, press STATUS again to
switch off the display.
Resetting the system
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to
the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.
Switch the receiver into standby.
Speaker System
Front
SMALL
Center
SMALL
Surr.
SMALL
SB
SMALLx2
SW
YES
Crossover
X-Curve
THX Audio Setting
80 Hz
OFF
0–0.3m
Inputs
See Input function default and possible settings on page 67.
MULTI-ZONE
Zone 2 Volume Type
Zone 2 Volume
Variable
–60
SR+
SR+ Control On/Off
OFF
SR+ Volume Control On/Off
OFF
Monitor Out
OFF
DSP
MCACC Position Memory
M1: MEMORY 1
2 While holding down the SETUP button on the front
panel, press  STANDBY/ON.
The display shows RESET NO.
Surround back channel
Processing
ON
Phase Control
ON
3
Full Band Phase Control
OFF
Press the ENTER button on the front panel.
4 Select RESET using /, then press the ENTER
button on the front panel.
The display shows RESET? OK.
5 Press ENTER to confirm.
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver
has been reset to the factory default settings.
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the
receiver is unplugged.
Sound Retriever
Sound Delay
Dual Mono
DRC
OFF
0 frame
CH1
AUTO
SACD Gain
0 dB
LFE Attenuate
0 dB
Auto delay
OFF
Digital Safety
OFF
Note
1 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.
En
On
Speakers
The front panel display shows each of the following
settings for two seconds each:
74
Amp
Digital Video Conversion
1 Press STATUS to check the system settings.
These appear on the front panel display.1
1
Default
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 75 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Using other functions
Setting
Effect Level
12
Default
ExtendedStereo
90
Other modes
50
2 PL II Music Options Center Width
3
Neo:6 Options
All Inputs
Dimension
0
Panorama
OFF
Center Image
3
Listening Mode (2 ch) AUTO SURROUND
Listening Mode (x ch) AUTO SURROUND
Listening Mode (HP)
STEREO
See also Setting the Audio options on page 70 for other default DSP
settings.
MCACC
Channel level (M1–M6)
0 dB
Speaker Distance (M1–M6)
Standing Wave
(M1–M6)
Standing Wave On/
Off
ON
ATT
0 dB
SWch Wide Trim
EQ Data (M1–M6)
EQ Wide Trim (M1–M6)
3.00 m
All channels/bands
0.0
0 dB
0.0 dB
75
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 76 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Controlling the rest of your system
13
Chapter 13:
Controlling the rest of your system
Setting the remote to control other
components
Most components can be assigned to one of the input
source buttons (such as DVD/LD or CD) using the
component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the
remote.
However, there are cases where only certain functions
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote
control will not work for the model that you are using.
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the
component you want to control, you can still teach the
remote individual commands from another remote
control (see Programming signals from other remote
controls below).
Note
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing
RECEIVER. To go back a step, press RETURN.
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote
automatically exits the operation.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
SELECT
SOURCE
D.ACCESS
CLASS
CLEAR
+10
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU DISC
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
TUNE
BAND
SETUP
CD
CD-R
DVD
TV
DVR2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
HDMI
BD
ENTER
RETURN
TV CONTROL
TV CTRL
RECEIVER
ST
PROGRAM TUNE
PTY SEARCH GUIDE
ZONE2/3
TUNER
ST
TV VOL
INPUT
SELECT
TV CH
VOL
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2
5 Use / to select the manufacturer’s name from
the list then press ENTER.
6 Use / to select the proper code from the list,
then try using this remote with your component.
The code should start with the component type (for
example, DVD 020). If there is more than one, start with
the first one.2
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or
off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE. If it doesn’t
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there
is one).
• If you can’t find or properly enter a preset code, you
can still teach the remote individual commands from
another remote control (see Programming signals
from other remote controls below).
7 If your component is controlled successfully, press
ENTER to confirm.
The remote LCD display shows OK.
Programming signals from other
remote controls
Selecting preset codes directly
RECEIVER
4 Use / to select the first letter of the brand name
of your component then press ENTER.
This should be the manufacturer’s name (for example, P
for Pioneer).
Use / to select PRESET then press ENTER.
3 Press the input source button for the component
you want to control then press ENTER.
The LCD on the remote displays the component you want
to control (for example DVD or TV).1
If the preset code for your component is not available, or
the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you
can program signals from the remote control of another
component. This can also be used to program additional
operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after
assigning a preset code.3
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use / to select LEARNING then press ENTER.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component
you want to control (for example DVD or TV).
3 Press the input source button for the component
you want to control then press ENTER.
PRES KEY shows in the LCD display.4
Note
1 You can’t assign the RECEIVER, TUNER, iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only) buttons.
2 • When using a Pioneer HDD recorder, please select PIONEER DVR 487, 488, 489 or 493.
• When using a Pioneer plasma display released prior to summer 2005, please select preset codes 637 or 660.
3 The remote can store about 200 preset codes (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).
4 • You can’t assign the RECEIVER, TUNER, iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only) buttons.
• TV CONTROL buttons (TV, TV VOL +/–, TV CH +/– and INPUT SELECT) can only be learned after selecting TV CTRL.
76
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 77 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Controlling the rest of your system
4 Point the two remote controls towards each other
then press the button that will be doing the learning on
this receiver’s remote control.
PRES KEY starts flashing to indicate the remote is ready
to accept a signal.
CLEAR
CLASS
DISC
ANALOG
ATT
7 Press and hold the RECEIVER button for a couple of
seconds to exit and store the operation(s).
Erasing one of the remote control
button settings
This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and
restores the button to the factory default.
D.ACCESS
ZONE2/3
TV CTRL
RECEIVER
HDMI
GENRE
i Pod
DIMMER
TUNER
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR2
DVR1
BD
SR+
TV
RECEIVER
SLEEP
SOURCE
CD-R
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
SELECT
CD
3 cm to 5 cm
DVD
• The remote controls should be 3 cm to 5 cm apart.
13
5 Press the corresponding button on the other
remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to
this receiver’s remote control.
For example, if you want to learn the playback control
signal, press and hold  briefly. The LCD display will
show OK if the operation has been learned.1
If for some reasons the operation hasn’t been learned the
LCD will display ERROR briefly and then display PRES
KEY again. If this happens, keep pressing the (teaching)
button as you vary the distance between the two remotes,
until the LCD display shows OK.2
Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be
learned from other remote controls.3 The buttons
available are shown below (with the exception of the TV
controls, a combination of SHIFT and these buttons can
also be learned):
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use / to select ERASE then press ENTER.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component
corresponding to the button setting to be erased.
3 Press the input source button corresponding to the
command to be erased then press ENTER.
The LCD display flashes PRES KEY.
4 Press and hold the button to be erased for two
seconds.
The LCD display shows OK or NO CODE to confirm the
button has been erased.
5
Repeat step 4 to erase other buttons.
6 Press and hold the RECEIVER button for a couple of
seconds when you’re done.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
SELECT
RECEIVER
SOURCE
Resetting the remote control presets
This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and
programmed buttons.
CD
CD-R
DVD
TV
DVR2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
HDMI
BD
TV CTRL
TUNER
RECEIVER
ZONE2/3
SLEEP
DIMMER
SR+
GENRE
2 Use / to select RESET then press ENTER.
RESET flashes in the LCD display.
ANALOG
ATT
PTY SEARCH
3 Press and hold ENTER for about two seconds.
The LCD shows OK to confirm the remote presets have
been erased.
TV CONTROL
INPUT
SELECT
TV VOL
D.ACCESS
CLASS
CLEAR
+10
DISC
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU SETUP
ST
PROGRAM TUNE
PTY SEARCH GUIDE
TV CONTROL
A
MUTE
B
RETURN
REC STOP JUKEBOX
EON
MPX
ST
ENTER
INFO
REC
TV/DTV
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
TUNE
BAND
VOL
TV CH
C
AUDIO SUBTITLE
DISP
D
E
HDD
DVD
CH
CH
T.DISP
PHOTO
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
6 To program additional signals for the current
component repeat steps 4 and 5.
To program signals for another component, exit and
repeat steps 1 through 5.
Confirming preset codes
Use this feature to check which preset code is assigned
to an input source button.
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use / to select READ ID then press ENTER.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the input source
button you want to check.
Note
1 Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.
2 • Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.
• If the remote LCD shows FULL, it means the memory is full. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings below to erase a programmed button
you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).
3 Note that the number key decimal button (+10/D.ACCESS) may not be learned with some components.
77
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 78 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
13
Controlling the rest of your system
3 Press the button of the component for which you
want to check the preset code, then press ENTER.
The brand name and preset code appears in the display
for three seconds.
2 Use / to select DIRECT F then press ENTER.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the
input source you want to control.
Renaming input source names
4 Use / to switch direct function ON or OFF then
press ENTER.
The LCD shows OK to confirm the setting.
You can customize the names that appear on the remote
LCD when you select an input source (for example, you
could change the name of DVR 1 to HDD/DVR).
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use / to select RENAME then press ENTER.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the
input source you want to rename.
3 Press the input source button you want to rename
then press ENTER.
4 Use / to select NAME EDT then press ENTER.
To reset the button to its original (default) name, select
NAME RST above.
5 Edit the name of the input source in the remote
control LCD, pressing ENTER when you’re finished.
Use / to change the character and / to move
forward/back a position. The name can be up to eight
characters (the possible characters are listed below).
3 Press the input source button for the component
you want to control then press ENTER.
Multi Operation and System Off
The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a
series of up to 5 commands for the components in your
system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on
your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using
only two buttons on the remote control.
Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use
one button to stop and switch off a series of components
in your system at the same time.2
Programming a multi-operation or a
shutdown sequence
SYSTEM OFF
RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECT
SOURCE
SETUP
CD
• Default setting: ON
When direct function is on, any component you select
(using the input source buttons) will be selected by both
the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct
function off, you can operate the remote control without
affecting the receiver.1
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
DISC
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
TUNE
BAND
0123456789 \ / * + – [space]
You can use the direct function feature to control one
component using the remote control while at the same
time, using your receiver to playback a different
component. This could let you, for example, use the
remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver
and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your
VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player.
CLASS
CLEAR
+10
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Direct function
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU CD-R
DVD
TV
DVR2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
SLEEP
HDMI
BD
DIMMER
ST
ENTER
RETURN
PROGRAM TUNE
PTY SEARCH GUIDE
TV CONTROL
TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
TUNER
ST
TV VOL
INPUT
SELECT
TV CH
VOL
RECEIVER
ANALOG
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use / to select MULTI OP or SYS OFF from the
menu and press ENTER.
If you selected Multi Operation (MULTI OP), the LCD on
the remote prompts you for an input source button.
If you selected System Off (SYS OFF), go to step 4.
3 Press the input source button for the component
that will start the multi-operation then press ENTER.
For example, if you want to start the sequence by
switching on your DVD player, press DVD.
4 Use / to select CODE EDT then press ENTER.
To erase any previously stored multi-operations (or
shutdown sequences) select CODE ERS above.
Note
1 You can’t use direct function with the TV CTRL function.
2 • Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see Setting the
remote to control other components on page 76 for more on this).
• Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.
• Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.
78
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 79 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Controlling the rest of your system
5 Use / to select a command in the sequence then
press ENTER.
If this is the first command in the sequence, select 1ST
CODE. Otherwise, simply choose the next command in
the sequence. PRES KEY flashes after you press ENTER.
13
Using multi operations
You can start multi operations with the receiver switched
on, or in standby.
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
6 If necessary, press the input source button for the
component whose command you want to input.
This is only necessary if the command is for a new
component (input source).
7 Select the button for the command you want to
input.
The following remote control commands can be selected:
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV. SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
RECEIVER
1 Press MULTI OPE.
MULTI OP flashes in the display.
2 Press an input source button that has been set up
with a multi operation.
The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the
programmed multi operation is performed automatically.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
SELECT
RECEIVER
MULTI OPE
SOURCE
Using System off
CD
CD-R
HDMI
DVD
TV
DVR2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
DVR1
i Pod
BD
TV CTRL
TUNER
RECEIVER
SYSTEM OFF
ZONE2/3
SLEEP
DIMMER
SR+
GENRE
RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECT
SOURCE
ANALOG
ATT
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
MULTI OPE
THX
SHIFT
PHASE
PTY SEARCH
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STANDARD ADV. SURR
MCACC
S.DIRECT
TV CONTROL
INPUT
SELECT
TV VOL
D.ACCESS
CLASS
CLEAR
+10
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU SETUP
CD
DVD
ST
PROGRAM TUNE
PTY SEARCH GUIDE
TV CONTROL
TV
HDMI
BD
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
MUTE
REC STOP JUKEBOX
EON
B
RETURN
CD-R
HOME MEDIA
A
MPX
ST
ENTER
INFO
REC
TV/DTV
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
TUNE
BAND
VOL
TV CH
DISC
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
C
AUDIO SUBTITLE
DISP
D
E
HDD
DVD
CH
CH
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
• You don’t need to program the receiver to switch on
or off. This is done automatically.
1 Press MULTI OPE.
MULTI OP flashes in the display.
2 Press SOURCE.
The command sequence you programmed will run, then
all Pioneer components will switch off1, followed by this
receiver.
With Pioneer components, you don’t need to:
• program the power to switch off in a shutdown
sequence (except DVD recorders);
• program the power to switch on if it’s the source
component selected in step 3;
• program a Pioneer TV or monitor to switch on if the
input function (selected in step 2) has video input
terminals;
Controls for TVs
This remote control can control components after
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the
commands (see Setting the remote to control other
components on page 76 for more on this). Use the input
source buttons to select the component.
These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).
8 Repeat steps 5–7 to program a sequence of up to
five commands.
9 When you’re finished, use / to select EDITEXIT
from the menu and press ENTER.
You will return to the remote control SETUP menu. Select
* EXIT * again to exit.
Note
1 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.
79
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 80 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Controlling the rest of your system
13
• The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are
dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the
TV CTRL button.
Button(s) Function
Components
TV
Press to switch the component
assigned to the TV CTRL
button on or off.
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
INPUT
SELECT
Switches the TV input. (Not
possible with all models.)
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
TV CH +/–
Selects channels.
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
TV VOL +/– Adjust the TV volume.
80
En
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
SOURCE
Switches the TV or CATV between Cable TV/Satellite
standby and on.
TV/TV

Use to choose the ‘A’ commands
on a Satellite TV menu.
Satellite TV

Use to choose the RED/B
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.
Satellite TV/TV

Use to choose the CYAN/E
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.
Satellite TV/TV

Use to choose the GREEN/C
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.
Satellite TV/TV

Use to choose the YELLOW/D
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.
Satellite TV/TV
AUDIO
Use to switch audio tracks.
Satellite TV/TV
SUBTITLE
(SHIFT+
DISP)
Use to return to the previously
selected channel.
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
GUIDE
Use as the GUIDE button for
navigating.
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
Controls for other components
This remote control can control these components after
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the
commands (see Setting the remote to control other
components on page 76 for more on this). Use the input
source buttons to select the component.
Button (s) Function
Components
SOURCE
Press to switch the component
between standby and on.
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD/DVR
player/VCR/
Cassette deck

Press to return to the start of the
CD/MD/CD-R/
current track or chapter.
DVD/LD/BD
Repeated presses skips to the start player
of previous tracks or chapters.

Press to advance to the start of the CD/MD/CD-R/
next track or chapter.
DVD/LD/BD
Repeated presses skips to the start player
of following tracks or chapters.

Pause playback or recording.
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD/DVR
player/VCR/
Cassette deck

Start playback.
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD/DVR
player/VCR/
Cassette deck

Hold down for fast forward
playback.
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD/DVR
player/VCR/
Cassette deck

Hold down for fast reverse
playback.
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD/DVR
player/VCR/
Cassette deck

Stops playback.
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD/DVR
player/VCR/
Cassette deck
 REC
(SHIFT+)
Starts recording.
MD/CD-R/DVR
player/VCR/
Cassette deck
Stops recording.
DVR player
Switches TEXT OFF for TVs.
TV
DISP
Use to display the channel
information.
Cable TV/TV
RETURN
Use to select RETURN or EXIT.
Satellite TV/TV
Number
buttons
Use to select a specific TV
channel.
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
REC STOP
(SHIFT+)
+10 button
Use to add a decimal point when
selecting a specific TV channel.
Satellite TV/TV
JUKEBOX
Switches to the Jukebox feature.
(SHIFT+)
DVR player
ENTER/
DISC
Use to enter a channel.
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
Number
buttons
Directly access tracks on a
program source.
MENU
Select the menu screen.
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
CD/MD/CD-R/
LD/BD player/
VCR
Use the number buttons to
navigate the on-screen display.
DVD/DVR player
/// Press to select or adjust and
& ENTER
navigate items on the menu
screen.
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
TOP MENU Switches TEXT ON for TVs.
TV
+10 button
Selects tracks higher than 10. (For CD/MD/CD-R/LD
example, press +10 then 3 to
player/VCR
select track 13.)
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 81 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Controlling the rest of your system
1
DVD
(SHIFT+
CH+)
Switches to the hard disk controls DVR player
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN
IN
SURR
STEREO
ADV.
S.DIRECT
SBch
STANDARD
MCACC
ER
THX
ISOPHASE
OPE
RECEIV
MULTI
CLASS
ENTER DISC
CH LEVEL
MENU
T.EDIT
RETURN
ST
BAND
VOL
MUTE
MEMORY
DVD
ENTER
TUNE
CH
TV CH
+10
TUNE
DTV INFO
ST
TV CONTROL
REC STOP
HDD
D.ACCESS
IN 1 (D
IN 2 (B
SHIFT
CONTROL
OUT
OUT
IN 2
(BD)
IN 2
IN 1
Y
IN 3
(DVR/
VCR 1)
(DVD/
LD)
IN 4
(CD-R)
1
IN 3
PB
IN 4
IN 2
4
ASSIGNABLE
Switches to the DVD controls
DVR player
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.
ZONE2
MPX
IN 1
CH
CD
HDD
(SHIFT+
CH–)
OPTICAL
INPUT
SELECT
CONTROL
2
LAN (10/100)
HDMI
DVD/BD/DVR
player
REC
IN
AV PARAMETE
TOP
MENU R
MAIN
SEL
Press to display information.
MUL
& SO
IN
OUT2
DTV MENU
SETUP
DISP
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
TV VOL
Switches to the VCR controls when VCR/DVD/DVR
using a VCR/DVD/HDD recorder. player
SUBTITLE
SHIFT+
AUDIO
GUIDE CATEGORY
Displays/changes the subtitles on DVD/BD/DVR
player
multilingual DVDs.
SIGNAL
SUBTITLE
(SHIFT+
DISP)
DISP
DVD/BD/DVR
player
AUDIO
Changes the audio language or
channel.
STATUS
AUDIO
2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component
to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the
connection.
OFF
SOURCE
VCR/DVD/DVR
player
SYSTEM
Selects channels.
ANALOG
ATT
CH +/–
TV CONT
DVD/BD/DVR
player
ROOM2/3
Press to access the DVD player
setup screen or Home Menu.
RECEIVER
GUIDE
1 Decide which component you want to use the
remote sensor of.
When you want to control any component in the chain,
this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the
corresponding remote control.
2
DVD/BD/DVR
player
1
/// Navigates DVD menu/options.
& ENTER
VIDEO
Cassette deck
INPUT
SELECT
Fast rewinds/fast forwards the
tape.
VIDEO
Cassette deck
/
XM RADIO
Starts playback.
TUNER
Cassette deck
ENTER
VIDEO
SEL
Cassette deck
Stops the tape.
R
Pauses the tape.

DIMMER

Important
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you
also have at least one set of analog audio, video or
HDMI jacks connected to another component for
grounding purposes.
TV
Displays menus concerning the
DVD/BD/DVR
current DVD or DVR you are using. player
SAT
MENU
LD player
DVD/BD/DVR
player
CD-R
Changes sides of the LD.
TOP MENU Displays the disc ‘top’ menu of a
DVD player.
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks
which can be used to link components together so that
you can use just the remote sensor of one component.
When you use a remote control, the control signal is
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.1
i Pod
Displays the setup screen for DVR DVR player
players.
RECEIVE
VCR/DVD/BD
player
SLEEP
Use as the ENTER button.
Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor
SR+
Multiple CD
player
DVD
Chooses the disc.
DVR2
Components
ENTER/
DISC
DVR1
Button (s) Function
13
IN 1 1
(DVD/
LD)
CONTROL
PR
2
Y
IN 2 (CD)
IN
(BD)
OUT
COAXIAL
OUT
PB
PR
ASSIGNABLE
1
4
DIGITAL
(VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT V
3 Continue the chain in the same way for as many
components as you have.
Note
1 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, refer to Setting the remote to control other components on page 76.
If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the remote sensor.
• See Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 61 if you are connecting a Pioneer plasma display.
81
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 82 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
14
Additional information
Chapter 14:
Additional information
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.
Power
Symptom
Remedy
The power does not turn on.
• Make sure that the power cable is plugged in to an active power outlet.
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.
The receiver suddenly switches • Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires. If
off or the Phase Control indicator so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.
blinks.
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized
independent service company.
During loud playback the power
suddenly switches off.
• Turn down the volume.
• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 42.
• Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down the SETUP button on the front panel, press 
STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use / to select D.SAFETY, and then use /
to select D.SAFETY 1 or D.SAFETY 2 (select D.SAFETY OFF to deactivate this feature). If the power switches
off even with D.SAFETY 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With D.SAFETY 1 or D.SAFETY 2 on, some
features may be unavailable.
The unit does not respond when
the buttons are pressed.
• Try switching the receiver off then back on again.
• Try disconnecting the power cable, then connect again.
AMP ERR blinks in the display,
then the power automatically
switches off. The MCACC blinks
and the power does not turn on.
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer
authorized independent service company for help.
FAN STOP blinks in the display,
then the power automatically
switches off.
• Something is obstructing the fan. Remove the obstruction and try switching the receiver back on. If the
fan is still not working, or you can’t remove the object, unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer
authorized independent service company.
• The fan is malfunctioning. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent
service company.
OVERHEAT blinks in the display • Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on.
then the power automatically
switches off.
82
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 83 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Additional information
14
No sound
Symptom
Remedy
No sound is output when an input
source is selected.
No sound output from the front
speakers.
• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).
• Make sure the correct input source is selected.
• Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SELECT). Note that when PCM is selected,
you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on page 12).
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
No sound from the surround or
center speakers.
• Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected; select
one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 50).
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 51).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
No sound from surround back
speakers.
• Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 50).
• Make sure surround back processing is set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on
page 31).
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS-ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with surround
back processing set to SBch Auto, there will be no sound from the surround back speakers. In this case,
set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 31).
• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back processing is set to SBch
ON and a surround mode is selected (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 19). If only one surround back
speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.
No sound from subwoofer.
• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 50).
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of your other
speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 50).
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings to
Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 50).
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options on
page 70).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 51).
No sound from one speaker.
• Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 51).
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 50).
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening mode, you
may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).
Sound is produced from analog • Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
components, but not from digital • Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected to
ones (DVD, LD, CD-ROM etc.).
(see The Input Setup menu on page 66).
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input source.
No sound is output or a noise is
output when Dolby Digital/DTS
software is played back.
• Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.
• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
No sound when using the System • If the HDMI input source is selected, sound is muted until exiting either menu.
Setup or Status menu.
• If sound is muted in the sub zone (ZONE 2), it will be restored after exiting the System Setup menu.
83
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 84 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
14
Additional information
Other audio problems
Symptom
Remedy
Broadcast stations cannot be
selected automatically, or there is
considerable noise in radio
broadcasts.
For FM broadcasts
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 22).
For AM broadcasts
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 22).
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor, etc.
Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.
A multichannel DVD source
appears to be downmixed to 2
channels during playback.
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs
on page 56).
Noise is output when scanning a • This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital information,
DTS CD.
making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when scanning.
When playing a DTS format LD
there is audible noise on the
soundtrack.
• Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
Can’t record audio.
• You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an analog
source.
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see Connecting analog
audio sources on page 18).
Recorded audio is different from • The RECOUT source is set to an input source other than the source you’re listening to. Select RECOUT
the current source, or inaudible. SOURCE to record the current input source (see Playing a different source when recording on page 72).
Subwoofer output is very low.
• To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see Speaker
Setting on page 50).
Everything seems to be set up
• The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the receiver are
correctly, but the playback sound matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
is odd.
• If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is set to
The PHASE CONTROL feature
doesn’t seem to have an audible the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on
the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).
effect.
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on page 51).
Noise or hum can be heard even • Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not
when there is no sound being
causing interference.
input.
There seems to be a time lag
between the speakers and the
output of the subwoofer.
• See Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 to set up
your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).
Can’t use the SR+ features.
• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to OFF (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on page 65).
The maximum volume available • This is not a malfunction. If the levels in Channel Level on page 51 have been adjusted, the maximum
(shown in the front panel display) volume will change accordingly.
is lower than the +12dB
maximum.
No sound is output from the CD- • Make sure that ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu is set to RECSEL (see ZONE
R/TAPE OUT, DVR/VCR1 OUT or Audio Setup on page 68).
DVR/VCR2 OUT jack.
Can’t select ZONE 2.
84
En
• Make sure that ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu is set to ZONE 2 (see ZONE
Audio Setup on page 68).
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 85 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Additional information
14
Video
Symptom
Remedy
No image is output when an input • Check the video connections of the source component (see page 16).
is selected.
• For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is
switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 71), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the
same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video, HDMI or
S-video cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 66).
• Check the video output settings of the source component.
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If adjusting
this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 71) and/or the resolution settings on
your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options
on page 71) OFF.
Can’t record video.
• Check that the source is not copy-protected.
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video cable is
used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted
picture.
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video
quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on
the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display
device using the same type of connection (component, S-video or composite), then start playback again.
Settings
Symptom
Remedy
The Auto MCACC Setup
continually shows an error.
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see also
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 9). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you
will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 50).
After using the Auto MCACC
• There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc. Switch off
Setup, the speaker size setting is all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.
incorrect.
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases.
Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 50, and use the ALL (Keep SP SYSTEM)
option for the Custom Menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39 if this is a recurring problem.
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker
Distance setting (page 44)
properly.
• Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are
matched up properly).
The display shows KEY LOCK
ON when you try to make
settings.
• With the receiver in standby, press  STANDBY/ON while holding down the SPEAKERS button to
disable the key lock.
Most recent settings have been
erased.
• The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.
85
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 86 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
14
Additional information
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
Symptom
Remedy
The EQ response displayed in the
graphical output following
calibration does not appear
entirely flat.
• There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJUST in the Auto
MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment needed.
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.
EQ adjustments made using the • Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in
Manual MCACC setup on
the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the filters dedicated to
page 42 do not appear to change overall system calibration.
the graphical output.
Lower frequency response
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers that
curves do not seem to have been have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.
calibrated for SMALL speakers. • Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable sound is
output for display.
Graphical output data seems to
have disappeared.
• If the power is switched off, the measurement data for graphical output to a PC is cleared.
Display
Symptom
Remedy
The display is dark or off.
• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.
After making an adjustment the
display goes off.
• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.
You can’t get DIGITAL to display • Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The Input
when using the SIGNAL SELECT Setup menu on page 66).
button.
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input source.
The Dolby/DTS indicator doesn’t
light when playing Dolby/DTS
software.
• These indicators do dot light if playback is paused.
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.
When playing a DVD-Audio disc, • This is not a malfunction. 96 kHz audio from DVD-Audio discs is only output from the analog outputs of
the DVD player display shows
the DVD player. This receiver cannot show the playback sample rate when using the analog inputs.
96 kHz. However, the receiver’s
display does not.
During playback of a DTS 96/24 • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
source, the display doesn’t show
96 kHz.
When playing Dolby Digital or
DTS sources, the receiver’s
format indicators do not light.
• Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.
When playing certain discs, none • The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what audio
of the receiver’s format
tracks are recorded on the disc.
indicators light.
When playing a disc with the
listening mode set to Auto
Surround, the 2 PL II or Neo:6
indicator lights on the receiver.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is not a
malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.
During playback of a Surround
• The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1 compatible.
EX or DTS-ES source on the SBch Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 31) then switch to the THX Surround
AUTO setting, the EX and ES
EX or Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).
indicators don’t light, or the
signal is not properly processed.
During playback of DVD-Audio,
the display shows PCM.
86
En
• This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a malfunction.
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 87 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Additional information
14
Remote control
Symptom
Remedy
Cannot be remote controlled.
• Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 6).
• Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see Operating range
of remote control unit on page 24).
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s
sensor on page 81).
Other components can’t be
• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.
operated with the system remote. • The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.
The SR cable is connected, but
• Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it’s connected to the right jack (see Using this receiver with a Pioneer
the connected components can’t plasma display on page 61).
be operated with the remote.
• Make sure that there is an analog or HDMI connection between the units. This is necessary for the SR
feature to work.
• Check that the other component is made by Pioneer. The SR feature only works with Pioneer equipment.
HDMI
Symptom
Remedy
The HDMI indicator blinks
continuously.
• Check all the points below.
No picture or sound.
• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCPcompatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component, S-video or composite video jacks.
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver (even
if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component, S-video or composite video jacks
between source and receiver.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please
consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
• If video images do not appear on your TV or plasma display, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor or
other setting for your component.
• If ‘NOT SUPPORT’ appears in the receiver’s display, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor or other
setting for your component.
• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio output.
• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI setting set to THROUGH, you
cannot hear audio output from all channels. In this case, make a digital or analog audio connection.
• To output signals in DeepColor, use an HDMI cable (compliant with Version 1.3a, Category 2) to connect
this receiver to a component or TV with the DeepColor feature.
No picture.
• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 71).
No sound, or sound suddenly
ceases.
• Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.
• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.
Noisy or distorted picture.
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video
quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on
the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display
device using the same type of connection (component, S-video or composite), then start playback again.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please
consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
HDCP ERROR shows in the
display.
• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible with
HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component, S-video or composite).
Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as
there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.
87
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 88 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
14
Additional information
USB interface (VSX-LX60 only)
Symptom
Remedy
USB mass storage device is not
recognized by the receiver.
• Try switching the receiver off, then on again.
• Make sure you have completely inserted the USB connector to this receiver.
• Check that the memory format is FAT16 or FAT32 (FAT12, NTFS and HFS are not supported).
• USB devices with an internal USB hub are not supported.
USB ERR3 shows in the display
when connecting a USB device.
• If this message continues to appear after going through all the checks in Important on page 35 of USB
playback, take the unit to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.
Can’t play audio files.
• The WMA or MPEG-4 AAC files were recorded using DRM (digital rights management), or the bit rate/
sampling rate is not compatible (see Compressed audio compatibility on page 35). This is not a
malfunction.
iPod messages
Symptom
Cause
Action
Error I1
There is a problem with the signal path from the Switch off the receiver and reconnect the iPod to the receiver.
iPod to the receiver.
If this doesn’t seem to work, try resetting your iPod.
Error I2
The software version being used with the iPod
needs to be updated.
Update the software being used with the iPod (please use the
latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 200410-20).
No Music Track
There are no playable songs currently stored in
the iPod.
Input some music files compatible with iPod playback.
Loading Error
There is no responce from the iPod.
Update the software being used with the iPod (please use the
latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 200410-20).
Note
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
88
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 89 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Additional information
14
Dolby Digital Plus
Surround sound formats
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound
formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial
broadcasts, and video cassettes.
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system
widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital
broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six discrete audio
channels, comprising five full range channels and a special
LFE (low frequency effects) channel used mainly for deep,
rumbling sound effects; hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby
Digital.
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital
decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,
stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit rates
and channels. Another feature, called Dialog Normalization,
attenuates programs based on the average level of dialog in
a program relative to its peak level (also known as Dialnorm)
in order to achieve uniform playback level.
Dolby Digital Surround EX
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended) is an
extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a surround
back channel is matrixed into the surround left/right
channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as
well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro
Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using the
innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system extracts
surround sound from sources as follows:
• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono surround)
from any stereo source
• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo
surround) from any stereo source
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound (stereo
surround and surround back) from two channel or
5.1(and 6.1) channel sources
Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio technology
for all high-definition programming and media. It combines
the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the
power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential
expected in the upcoming high-definition era. Built on Dolby
Digital, the multi-channel audio standard for DVD and HD
broadcasts worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for
the next-generation A/V receivers but remains fully
compatible with all current A/V receivers.
Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs of
up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs in a
single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate
potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate
performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps on
Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for
playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby Digital
Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended
by directors and producers.
It also features multi-channel sound with discrete channel
output, interactive mixing and streaming capability in
advanced systems. Supported by High-Definition Media
Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is
possible for high-definition audio and video.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding
technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the
upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound that
is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, unlocking the true
high-definition entertainment experience on high-definition
optical discs in the next generation. When coupled with
high-definition video, Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented
home theater experience with stunning sound and highdefinition picture.
It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8 fullrange channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz audio. It
also features extensive metadata including dialogue
normalization and dynamic range control. Supported by
High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable
digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and
video.
HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their
maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas
Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than
eight audio channels.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
“Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is
generated by bass management in the receiver.
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds
surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced
surround listening with greater sound detail.
89
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 90 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
14
Additional information
DTS
The DTS technologies are explained below. See
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.
transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96 kHz/24-bit
7.1-channel audio sources without deteriorating the quality
of the original sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is an
irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound faithfully
as intended by the creator of music or movies.
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS-HD
Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system
from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games. It can
deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full
range channels, including an LFE channel. Higher sound
quality is achieved through the use of a low compression
rate, and high rates of transmittance during playback.
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a
discrete surround format developed by Microsoft
Corporation.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder
that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with a completely separate
(discrete) surround back channel. DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a
surround back channel matrixed into the surround left/right
channels. Both sources are also compatible with a
conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from
any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1
channel sources. It uses both the channel information
already encoded into the source, as well as its own
processing to determine channel localization (with two
channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is generated by
bass management in the receiver). Two modes (Cinema and
Music) are available using DTS Neo:6 with two channel
sources.
WMA9 Pro can support up to 5.1/7.1 channel playback with
sampling rates up to 24-bit/96 kHz. Using the unique WMA
compression techniques, WMA9 Pro can deliver
multichannel music and soundtracks over high-speed
internet networks at low bit rates with minimal audio
degradation. Playback may be enjoyed with the Windows
Media Player 9 Series (or above) and other third-party media
players on a personal computer, or with an AV amplifier with
on-board WMA9 Pro decoding.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
About THX
The THX technologies are explained below. See
www.thx.com for more detailed information.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital
Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio using
a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully backward
compatible with all existing decoders. This means that DVD
players can play this software using a conventional DTS 5.1
channel decoder.
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology
supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer rates.
This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD DVD and
secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting the potential
applicability to upcoming broadcasts and memory audio
contents.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master
audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners
without any loss of data, preserving audio quality. DTS-HD
Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates, facilitating
data transfer to the maximum rate of 24.5 Mbps in the
Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in the HD-DVD format, which
by far exceeds that of a standard DVD. These high data
90
En
•
THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by
THX Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your
experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your
home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called
dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres
with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then
transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not
changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX
engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate
the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home,
correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product,
when the THX indicator is on, the following THX features are
automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX
Surround EX) (see page 91).
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 91 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Additional information
•
Re-Equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and
harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because
film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie
theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization
restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in
a small home environment.
•
Timbre Matching
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the
direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is
an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all
around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to
the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely
match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front
speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and
surround speakers.
•
Adaptive Decorrelation
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create
an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre
there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround
speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and
envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest
speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive
Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel’s time and
phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This
expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers—
the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.
•
THX Select2
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 certified, it
must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous
series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product
feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home
Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for
many years to come. THX Select2 requirements cover every aspect of
the product including pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance
and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital
and analog domain.
•
THX Surround EX
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development
of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film
soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX
technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been
added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the
currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right,
surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel
provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the
listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound
localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the
Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be
found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.
Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX
logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this
new technology in the home.
This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during
the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the
Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may
not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the
tastes of the individual listener.
14
•
Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed
to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal
surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater
system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround
Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and
Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together
facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the
largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the
Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up
screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the
speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound-field.
ASA is used in three new modes; THX Select2 Cinema, THX
MusicMode and THX Games Mode.
•
THX Select2 Cinema mode
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all eight speakers
giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode,
ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back
surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and
directional surround sounds.
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX
encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Select2
Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded.
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital
flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that
you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select
the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Select2 Cinema
mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.
•
THX MusicMode
For the replay of multi-channel music the THX MusicMode should be
selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround
channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital
and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.
•
THX Games Mode
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX
Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing
is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game
sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately
places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360
degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives
you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.
THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd. which may be
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
About Neural Surround
VSX-LX70 only
Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in surround
technology and has been adopted by FM Radio and Neural Music
Direct for broadcasts of surround recordings and live events.
Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain
processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with
superior localization of surround elements. System playback is
scalable from stereo up to state-of-the-art multichannel surround.
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation,
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in some
jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
91
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 92 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
14
Additional information
Listening modes with different input signal formats
The following charts outline the listening modes available with different input signal formats, depending on the surround back
channel processing and decoding method you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
SBch Processing
Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON/AUTO
(Automatically
selects 6.1/7.1
channel decoding)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
WMA9 Pro
(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 PRO LOGICa
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THXa
THX GAMES MODEb
Stereo playback
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD
DTS-EXPRESS
WMA9 Pro
(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)
Stereo playback
THX CINEMA
As above
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
As above
–
As above
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 PRO LOGICa
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THXa
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
THX GAMES MODEb
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
DTS Surround
As above
As above
Neo:6 CINEMA
SACD
As above
–
Stereo playback
Other stereo sources
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 PRO LOGICa
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THXa
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
THX GAMES MODEb
Stereo playback
Neural THXc
SBch
Processing
OFFd
(Maximum 5.1
channel playback)
92
En
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
WMA9 Pro
(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Stereo playback
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD
DTS-EXPRESS
WMA9 Pro
(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)
Stereo playback
THX CINEMA
As above
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
As above
–
As above
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 93 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Additional information
14
SBch Processing
Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
OFFd
(Maximum 5.1
channel playback)
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
DTS Surround
As above
As above
Neo:6 CINEMA
SACD
As above
–
Stereo playback
Other stereo sources
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGICa
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
Neural THXc
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
Stereo playback
a.2 Pro Logic has a maximum of 5.1 channel playback.
b.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
c.VSX-LX70 only – Available only with the FM or HOME MEDIA GALLERY input.
d.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.
Multichannel signal formats
SBch Processing
Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
Straight decoding
THX CINEMA
Straight decoding
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIEa
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
THX SURROUND EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THXa
THX Select2 CINEMAa
THX MUSICMODEa
THX GAMES MODEa
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Straight decoding
–
Straight decoding
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro
(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Straight decoding
THX CINEMA
THX Select2 CINEMAa
THX MUSICMODEa
THX GAMES MODEa
Straight decoding
Dolby Digital EX
(6.1 channel flagged)
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIEa
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
THX SURROUND EX
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THXa
THX Select2 CINEMAa
THX MUSICMODEa
THX GAMES MODEa
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic IIx
MOVIEa
SBch
Dolby Digital Plus
Processing
Dolby TrueHD
ON
DTS-HD
(7.1 channel
DTS-HD Master Audio
decoding used for WMA9 Pro (44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
all sources)
PCM
(6.1/7.1 channel)
93
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 94 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
14
Additional information
SBch Processing
Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON
(7.1 channel
decoding used for
all sources)
DTS-ESb
(6.1 channel sources/
6.1 channel flagged)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
DTS-ES+THX (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIE+THXa
THX Select2 CINEMAa
THX MUSICMODEa
THX GAMES MODEa
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS and DTS 96/24
(5.1 channel encoding)
DTS+Neo:6
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
DTS+Neo:6+THX
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIE+THXa
THX Select2 CINEMAa
THX MUSICMODEa
THX GAMES MODEa
DTS+Neo:6
Dolby Digital
WMA9 Pro
(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
PCM
(5.1 channel encoding)
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIEa
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
THX SURROUND EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THXa
THX Select2 CINEMAa
THX MUSICMODEa
THX GAMES MODEa
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
SACD
(5.1 channel encoding)
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIEa
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
THX MUSICMODE
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro
PCM
(6.1/7.1 channel)
Straight decoding
THX CINEMA
Straight decoding
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Straight decoding
–
Straight decoding
Dolby Digital EX
(6.1 channel flagged)
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIEa
THX SURROUND EX
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
DTS-ESb (6.1 channel
sources/6.1 channel flagged)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS-ES+THX (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
Other 5.1 channel sources
(5.1 channel encoding)
Straight decoding
(Maximum 5.1 channel
playback)
THX Select2 CINEMA
(Maximum 5.1 channel
THX CINEMA playback with only
one surround back speaker)
Straight decoding
(Maximum 5.1 channel
playback)
SACD
(5.1 channel encoding)
Straight decoding
(Maximum 5.1 channel
playback)
THX MUSICMODEa
Straight decoding
(Maximum 5.1 channel
playback)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
SACD
(5.1 channel)
Straight decoding
–
Straight decoding
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel
sources
As above
THX CINEMA
As above
SBch
Processing
AUTO
(Automatically
selects 6.1/7.1
channel
decoding)
SBch
Processing
OFFc
(Maximum 5.1
channel
playback)
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
b.ES processing is not carried out for certain DTS-ES signals input from HDMI.
c.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.
94
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 95 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Additional information
14
Stream direct with different input signal formats
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see
Using Stream Direct on page 30) you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
Surround Back speaker(s)
Connected
(Maximum 7.1 channel playback)
Not connected
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback)
Input signal format
DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
DTS Surround
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sources
Stereo playback
Stereo playback
Analog sources
As above
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM sources
As above
PCM DIRECT (stereo)
DVD-A sources
As above
PCM DIRECT (stereo)
SACD sources
As above
SACD DIRECT (stereo)a
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic II MOVIE
2 Pro Logic II MOVIE
DTS Surround
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sources
Stereo playback
Stereo playback
Analog sources
As above
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM sources
As above
PCM DIRECT (stereo)
DVD-A sources
As above
PCM DIRECT (stereo)
SACD sources
As above
SACD DIRECT (stereo)a
a.SACD DIRECT (VSX-LX70) or Straight decoding (VSX-LX60)
Multichannel signal formats
Surround Back speaker(s)
Connected
(Maximum 7.1 channel playback)
Not connected
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback)
Input signal format
DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIEa
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIEa
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DVD-A sources/Muti-ch PCM
Straight decoding
PCM DIRECT
SACD sources
(5.1 channel encoding)
As above
SACD DIRECTb
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
As above
Straight decoding
DVD-A sources/Muti-ch PCM
Straight decoding
PCM DIRECT
SACD sources
(5.1 channel encoding)
As above
SACD DIRECTb
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
As above
Straight decoding
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
b.SACD DIRECT (VSX-LX70) or Straight decoding (VSX-LX60)
95
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 96 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
14
Additional information
Component Video Section
Specifications
Amplifier Section
Continuous Power Output (Stereo)
Front. . . . . . . 180 W + 180 W (LX70), 170 W + 170 W (LX60)
(DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 6 Ω)
Front. . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W (LX70), 140 W + 140 W (LX60)
(DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)
Continuous Power Output (Multichannel)
(DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 6 Ω)
Front. . . . . . . 180 W + 180 W (LX70), 170 W + 170 W (LX60)
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W (LX70), 170 W (LX60)
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 W + 180 W (LX70)
170 W + 170 W (LX60)
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 W + 180 W (LX70)
170 W + 170 W (LX60)
(DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)
Front. . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W (LX70), 140 W + 140 W (LX60)
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W (LX70), 140 W (LX60)
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 W + 150 W (LX70)
140 W + 140 W (LX60)
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 W + 150 W (LX70)
140 W + 140 W (LX60)
Rated Power Output – Stereo (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09 %, 8 Ω)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W+140 W (LX70), 130 W+130 W (LX60)
• The above specifications are applicable when the
power supply is 230 V.
Audio Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 mV/47 kΩ
Frequency Response (LINE) . . . . . . 5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB
Output (Level/Impedance)
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 mV/2.2 kΩ
Tone Control
BASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 6 dB (100 Hz)
TREBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 6 dB (10 kHz)
LOUDNESS . . . . . . . . . . . +4 dB/+2 dB (100 Hz/10 kHz)
(at volume position –40 dB)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
[DIN (continuous rated power output/50 mW)]
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 dB/65 dB
Composite Video / S-Video Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 dB
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hz to 10 MHz
96
En
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 dB
Frequency Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hz to 100 MHz
FM Tuner Section
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Usable Sensitivity . . . . . . . Mono: 15.2 dBf, IHF (1.6 µV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 20.2 dBf
Stereo: 41.2 dBf
Sensitivity (DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 1.1 µV (S/N 26 dB)
Stereo: 50 µV (S/N 46 dB)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 76 dB (at 85 dBf)
Stereo: 72 dB (at 85 dBf)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 62 dB
Stereo: 58 dB
Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stereo: 0.6 % (1 kHz)
Alternate Channel Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 dB (400 kHz)
Stereo Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 dB (1 kHz)
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz to 15 kHz ± 1dB
Antenna Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Ω unbalanced
AM Tuner Section
Frequency Range . . . . . . . .531 kHz to 1602 kHz (9 kHz step)
Sensitivity (IHF, Loop antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 µV/m
Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 dB
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna
Miscellaneous
Power Requirements . . . . . . AC 220 V to 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 W
In standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6 W (HDMI Control OFF)
0.8 W (HDMI Control ON)
AC Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (switched) 100 W/0.4 A MAX.
Dimensions . . . . . . 420 (W) mm x 187 (H) mm x 459 (D) mm
Weight (without package) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0 kg
Furnished Parts
Setup microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . . . .
AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
These operating instructions
Operating instructions for HOME MEDIA GALLERY
(VSX-LX70 only)
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
Note
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible
modifications without notice, due to improvements.
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 97 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
Additional information
Cleaning the unit
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and
dirt.
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth
dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six
times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe
again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or
cleansers.
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or
other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will
corrode the surface.
Our philosophy
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater
listening experience as close as possible to the vision of
the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they
created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing
on three important steps:
1
Achieving the highest possible sound quality
2 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration
according to any listening area
3 Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of worldclass studio engineers1
Features
• Easy setup using Advanced MCACC
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate
surround sound setup, which includes the advanced
features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This
innovative technology measures the reverb
characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to
customize your system calibration with the help of a
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or
using a computer. With the additional benefits of
numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave
control and microphone measurements from a series of
reference points, your home theater experience can be
truly customized for optimal surround sound.
• HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only)
This receiver can play back contents stored on your
computer when your computer is connected to the LAN
terminal of this receiver. Also, you can listen to the
Internet radio stations.
14
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders
not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby
Surround sources, but will also generate convincing
surround sound for any stereo source.
Also, with the addition of a surround back speaker, you
can take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and
DTS-ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.
Furthermore, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD,
which are designed for the next-generation highdefinition media such as Blu-ray Disc and HD DVD,
support up to 7.1 channels and 8 channels respectively.
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology
supporting up to 5.1 channels, with fixed data transfer
rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps (this encoding is
available only when signals are delivered to this receiver
as primary audio).
DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners
without any loss of data with its high transfer rates.
• Phase Control
The Phase Control feature corrects the phase distortion
as well as group delay for LFE (Low-Frequency Effects)
audio signals during multichannel playback.
• Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature analyzes the
frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers
connected and corrects the phase distortion to the
flattened frequency-phase characteristics. This
correction minimizes the group delay of the middle- and
low-frequency ranges against the high-frequency range
and improves the frequency-phase characteristics
across all ranges. Furthermore, the enhanced frequencyphase characteristics between channels ensure better
surround sound integration.
• HDMI and digital video conversion
This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video
format (HDMI Version 1.3), providing you with highdefinition digital video/audio via a single cable.
High-quality sound formats such as DTS-HD and Dolby
TrueHD are supported while this receiver is also
compatible with the DeepColor feature. You can operate
this receiver in synchronization with your Pioneer
component that supports the HDMI Control function by
connecting your component to this receiver via HDMI.
Also, the built-in digital video converter of this receiver
makes both de-interlacing and up-scaling possible, and
analog video signals being input are converted and
output as digital video signals at the HDMI terminal.
• Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby
Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, Dolby
Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-EXPRESS and DTS-HD
Master Audio
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound
right into your home with up to six channels of surround
sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects)
channel for deep, realistic sound effects.
97
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 98 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
14
Additional information
• DCDi
Faroudja’s DCDi Processing is selectable and ensures
that images are smooth and natural, without staircasing
or jaggies.
• iPod Ready
With the new iPod terminal, you’ll be up and running in
no time, now that this receiver’s enhanced compatibility
makes on-screen control of your iPod an added
possibility.
1
With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has been designated
AIR Studios Monitor Reference:
98
En
VSX_LX60LX70.book Page 100 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 3:13 PM
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D. F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-427 0
K002_B_En
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2007 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
<ARB7381-A>
Printed in
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement